Частотный преобразователь baumuller коды ошибок

Качественный ремонт сервопривода Baumuller в на компонентном уровне в максимально сжатые сроки. Специалисты компании накопили бесценный опыт в том числе опыт в ремонте сервоприводов BAUMULLER. Ремонт сервоприводов Baumuller имеет ряд индивидуальных особенностей
  • Ремонт сервопривода Baumuller
  • Особенности ремонта сервопривода Baumuller
  • Коды ошибок сервопривода Baumuller
  • Схемы типовых подключений сервоприводов Baumuller
  • Преимущество ремонта сервоприводов Baumuller в нашем сервисном центре
  • Оставить заявку на ремонт сервопривода Baumuller

Ремонт сервопривода Baumuller

Ремонт сервопривода Baumuller b maxx 4000Сервисный центр «Кернел» предлагает выполнить качественный ремонт сервопривода Baumuller в на компонентном уровне в максимально сжатые сроки. Сервопривод относятся к сложной промышленной электронике именно поэтому ремонтом сервоприводов BAUMULLER, впрочем, как и других производителей должны заниматься специалисты, имеющие не только высшее техническое образование, но и солидный опыт в ремонте подобной промышленной электроники.

Также для восстановления подобного промышленного оборудования понадобится хорошая материально-техническая база. При выполнении всех выше перечисленных условий, шансы на успешный ремонт сервопривода Baumuller возрастают в геометрической прогрессии.

Именно поэтому за ремонтом сервоприводов, независимо от производителя лучше всего обращаться в специализированный сервисный центр, который отвечает всем техническим требованиям, такой как Кернел. Наш цент имеет отличную материально-техническую базу, а за время существования с 2002 года специалисты компании накопили бесценный опыт в том числе опыт в ремонте сервоприводов BAUMULLER.

Особенности ремонта сервопривода Baumuller

Ремонт сервопривода Baumuller b maxx 3000Ремонт сервоприводов Baumuller имеет ряд индивидуальных особенностей, это связано с конструктивными особенностями данного промышленного оборудования. По аналогии с частотными преобразователями они состоят из двух взаимосвязанных частей, это:

  • Аппаратная часть;
  • Программная часть.

В первую очередь ремонтируется аппаратная часть промышленного сервопривода. После глубокой диагностики неисправного блока выявляются все неисправные компоненты, которые в последствии заменяются на оригинальные запасные части (по возможности), в случае если сервопривод уже давно снят с производства и найти оригинальные запчасти просто невозможно они заменяются на аналоги.

Данный вид ремонта называется компонентным. От других видов его отличает две немаловажные детали.

  • Значительное удешевление ремонта;
  • Существенное сокращение времени ремонта.

По завершении ремонта аппаратной части сервопривода наступает очередь программной. В зависимости от серии выбирается программный продукт и зашивается в блок.

Заключительный этап ремонта сервопривода BAUMULLER это проверка на специализированном стенде. Все блоки проверяются без нагрузки и с нагрузкой не менее двух часов.

Коды ошибок сервопривода Baumuller

При обнаружении неисправности при работе сервопривода будет активирована соответствующая защита и выведено предупреждающее сообщение на дисплей сервоуслилителя или цифрового пульта. Коды неисправностей приведены в таблице ниже.

Все коды ошибок сервоприводов Baumuller BM4400, BM4600 и BM4700 представлены в руководстве пользователя (manual) в файле ниже.

Смотреть все выводимые ошибки сервопривода Baumuller BM4400, BM4600 и BM4700.

Схемы

Схемы типовых подключений сервоприводов Baumuller

В некоторых случает может понадобится схема подключения сервоприводов, ниже мы показаны схемы сервопривода BAUMULLER b maxx.

Схема подключения с напрямую управляемым моторным тормозом BAUMULLER BM4400, BM4600 и BM4700

Схема подключения с непосредственным управлением через дополнительное реле BAUMULLER BM4400, BM4600 и BM4700

Схема подключения с напрямую управляемым моторным тормозом BAUMULLER BM4400, BM4600 и BM4700

Схема подключения с непосредственным управлением через дополнительное реле BAUMULLER BM4400, BM4600 и BM4700

Преимущество ремонта сервоприводов Baumuller в нашем сервисном центре

Во время эксплуатации электроприводов BAUMULLER может возникнуть проблема, далеко не всегда возникшую проблему можно исправить на месте своими силами, наш сервисный центр готов вам в этом помочь, выполнив качественный ремонт сервоприводов BAUMULLER в сжатые сроки с полугодовой гарантией.

Мы не только восстановим неисправный блок, но и подскажем как действовать в той или иной ситуации для максимально долгой и безаварийной работы сервопривода.

Работы, проводимые при ремонте сервопривода Baumuller в :

Логотип компании 'Кернел'

  • Предварительный осмотр на возможность восстановления бесплатный;
  • Мы производим ремонт сервопривода BAUMULLER на компонентном уровне (экономия бюджета и времени)
  • При ремонте сервоприводов ни каких конструктивных изменений не вносим;
  • Ремонт блоков с применением оригинальных запасных частей (по возможности).
  • Вы платите исключительно за результат — работающий сервопривод;
  • Гарантия на ремонт сервопривода Baumuller и на запасные части замененные в процессе ремонта 6 месяцев;
  • Сроки ремонта варьируются от 5 до 15 рабочих дней;

За два десятилетия существования сервисного центра нашими специалистами были успешно проведены тысячи подобных ремонтов с каждым разом поднимая квалификацию наших инженеров. Ниже представлен далеко не полный список сервоприводов BAUMULLER серии b maXX ремонтируемые в нашем сервисном центре.

Ремонт сервопривода Baumuller

BM4412-ST1-01200-03

Ремонт сервопривода Baumuller

BM4413-ST1-01200-03

Ремонт сервопривода Baumuller

BM4422-ST1-01200-03

Ремонт сервопривода Baumuller

BM4423-ST1-01200-03

Ремонт сервопривода Baumuller

BM4424-ST0-01200-03

Ремонт сервопривода Baumuller

BM4426-ST1-01200-03

Ремонт сервопривода Baumuller

BM4432-Z16-01215-0309

Ремонт сервопривода Baumuller

BM4433-SI0-01200-03

Ремонт сервопривода Baumuller

BM4434-SI1-01200-03-E80

Ремонт сервопривода Baumuller

BM4435-SI0-01200-03

Ремонт сервопривода Baumuller

BM4443-SI-01200-03

В таблице представлены исключительно сервопривода BAUMULLER серии b maXX ремонт которых мы вам предлагаем, также специалисты нашей компании ремонтируют сервопривода не зависимо от серии и под каким брендом они были выпущены.

Оставить заявку на ремонт сервопривода Baumuller

У вас остались вопросы, связанные с ремонтом или сбросом ошибок, а также программированием и настройкой сервоприводов BAUMULLER? Оставьте заявку на ремонт сервопривода Baumuller в нашим менеджерам. Связаться с ними можно несколькими способами:

Наши контакты

  • Заказав обратный звонок (кнопка в правом нижнем углу сайта)
  • Посредством чата (кнопка расположена с левой стороны сайта)
  • Позвонив по номеру телефона: +7(8482) 79-78-54; +7(917) 121-53-01
  • Написав на электронную почту: 89171215301@mail.ru

За время существования сервисного центра нашими специалистами были отремонтированы тысячи единиц промышленной электроники. Вот далеко не полный список производителей промышленной электроники и оборудования, ремонтируемой в нашей компании.

Ошибки частотных преобразователей: примеры и коды ошибок

Частотные преобразователи — это электронные или электротехнические устройства, предназначенные для изменения и регулировки частоты электрического напряжения. Сфера их использования очень широка: насосные станции, системы тепло- и водоснабжения, линии производства, конвейеры, лифты, центрифуги, мельницы, металлургические агрегаты, буровое оборудование и т. д.

Использование частотных преобразователей на промышленных объектах дает следующие преимущества:

  • Возможность отказаться от регулирующего оборудования: дросселей, вариаторов, редукторов и др. Это существенно упрощает работу механической системы, снижает расходы на эксплуатацию и повышает ее надежность.
  • Плавный разгон управляемого двигателя, защищающий его от механических ударов и пусковых токов, что продлевает срок его службы.
  • Частотные преобразователи в паре с асинхронными двигателями можно использовать в качестве альтернативы для приводов постоянного тока.
  • Максимально рациональное регулирование скорости контролируемых двигателей и связанных с этим технологических процедур.
  • Экономия электроэнергии, благодаря устранению ее неоправданных трат.

Но, несмотря на свою надежность и эффективность, частотные преобразователи, как и любые электронные приборы, подвержены износу. Инженерная компания 555 специализируется на ремонте промышленной электроники, и в частности — на устранении ошибок частотных преобразователей. Наши специалисты готовы отремонтировать вышедшее из строя оборудование в кратчайшие сроки.

Основные виды и причины неисправностей

Опознать неисправности частотников позволяют коды ошибок, высвечивающиеся на мониторе устройства. Каждая такая комбинация символов указывает на совершенно конкретную проблему, и это помогает специалистам выработать правильную стратегию ремонта. Для начала рассмотрим типовые виды ошибок частотных преобразователей:

  1. Over Current или OC. Данный сигнал на мониторе устройства свидетельствует о его перегрузке. Если подобная проблема возникла при тестовом запуске, необходимо проверить соответствие токов регулятора и электрической машины, а также исправность электроцепей управляемого двигателя. Следует учесть, что некоторые модели частотников высвечивают ошибку Over Current при торможении, работе и запуске электродвигателя.
  2. Over Heat или ОН. Это сообщение указывает на превышение номинально допустимой температуры частотного преобразователя. Проще говоря — на его перегрев. Устранить проблему можно посредством чистки внутреннего вентилятора или установки дополнительной вентиляционной системы в бокс, где располагается преобразователь. В качестве профилактики следует размещать частотник в месте, гарантирующем эффективный отвод тепла.
  3. Over Load или OL. Такая ошибка преобразователя может быть вызвана двумя обстоятельствами: превышением на валу момента силы или перегревом управляемого двигателя. Чтобы устранить проблему, необходимо выполнить корректную настройку тепловой защиты. Для этого во время программирования устройства нужно задать требуемую величину тока и время срабатывания защитной функции.
  4. Low Voltage или LV. Ошибка высвечивается при снижении напряжения питания или обрыве фаз (одной или двух). Существует два варианта решения этой проблемы: «насильственная» остановка двигателя или настройка его работы в однофазном режиме.
  5. Over Voltage или OV. Такую надпись можно увидеть на мониторе при замедлении вращения двигателя. Для устранения неисправности необходимо воспользоваться одним из трех способов: переводом устройства в режим генератора, активацией тормозного резистора или перенастройкой системы защиты от повышенного напряжения.

Среди других типовых неисправностей преобразователя следует выделить вращение двигателя в неправильном направлении, невозможность его запуска, проблемы с торможением и разгоном и т. д. Каждое повреждение имеет под собой конкретные причины. Например, если двигатель разгоняется очень медленно, скорее всего, дело в срабатывании функции токоограничения в момент разгона.

В число наиболее распространенных причин неисправностей входят:

  1. Заводской брак. Как правило, фабричные дефекты дают о себе знать в течение гарантийного срока. Поэтому для их устранения следует обращаться к поставщику или в брендовый сервисный центр.
  2. Ошибки при монтаже. Чаще всего причиной неисправностей становится некорректная сборка схемы привода или установка частотника в неподходящем месте.
  3. Нарушение норм эксплуатации. Регламент технического обслуживания изложен в инструкции, прилагаемой к устройству. Игнорирование регламента может привести к выходу из строя полупроводниковых элементов, перегреванию частотного регулятора и другим неисправностям.
  4. Несоответствие частотного преобразователя условиям его эксплуатации. Основные критерии выбора частотника — электрические характеристики двигателя, исполнение, набор функций и т. д. Несоответствие параметров условиям его эксплуатации приводит к некорректной работе устройства, выходу из строя и многочисленным поломкам.

Теперь поговорим об ошибках преобразователя частоты более подробно и предметно. В качестве примера рассмотрим привод известного китайского бренда INVT ELECTRIC CO, серии GDXXX. Предлагаем вашему вниманию таблицу, в которой представлены коды ошибок устройства, их расшифровка, вероятные причины неисправностей, а также способы их устранения.

Код ошибки Расшифровка Вероятные причины Способы устранения
OUt1, 2, 3 Ошибка фазы. Отсутствие заземления или контакта при подсоединении кабеля; слишком маленькое время разгона. Увеличение времени разгона;
замена модуля IGBT; устранение неисправностей внешнего оборудования; переподключение кабеля.
OC1, 2, 3 Токовая перегрузка при разгоне, торможении или постоянной скорости. Чрезмерное время торможения или разгона; слишком высокое напряжение в сети; недостаточная мощность привода;
потеря фазы или короткое замыкание «на землю»; воздействие внешнего фактора.
Сокращение времени разгона;
оптимизация питающего напряжения;
приобретение привода с более высокой мощностью; проверка конфигурации выхода;
устранение внешних помех.
OV1, 2, 3 Сверхнапряжение при разгоне, торможении или постоянной скорости. Напряжение на входе не соответствует параметрам привода;
чрезмерная энергия торможения.
Проверка входного напряжения;
оптимизация времени торможения/разгона.
UV Слишком низкое напряжение шины. Пониженное напряжение питания. Проверка и оптимизация входного напряжения.
OL1 Перегрузка электродвигателя. Слишком низкое питающее напряжение;
неверно заданные параметры тока;
чрезмерная нагрузка на электродвигатель.
Проверка входного напряжения;
настройка правильных параметров тока в двигателе;
оптимизация нагрузки.
OL2 Перегрузка преобразователя частоты. Чрезмерно быстрый разгон;
остановка двигателя;
заниженное питающее напряжение;
сверхнагрузка;
длительная работа двигателя на низкой скорости.
Увеличение времени разгона;
снижение нагрузки на двигатель;
проверка мощности двигателя и входного напряжения;
приобретение привода с более высокой мощностью;
замена двигателя.
OL3 Перегрузка по электричеству. Сигнализация перегрузки в соответствии с заданными параметрами. Проверка нагрузки и точки перегрузки.
SPI Потеря фаз входа. Потеря колебания или фазы напряжения трех входных фаз. Проверка и оптимизация входного напряжения и/или правильности монтажа.
SPO Потеря фаз выхода. Асимметричная нагрузка. Проверка выхода, двигателя и кабеля.
OH1 Перегревание выпрямителя. Неисправность вентилятора или засорение вентиляционного канала;
слишком высокая температура воздуха в помещении;
чрезмерно затянутый запуск устройства.
Замена вентилятора и проверка воздуховода;
снижение температуры окружающей среды;
проверка и восстановление воздухообмена;
оптимизация мощности нагрузки;
замена модуля IGBT;
ремонт платы управления.
EF Неисправность внешних элементов. Повреждение клеммы SIn и/или других внешних клемм. Замена пришедших в негодность клемм.
CE Проблемы со связью. Некорректная скорость в бодах;
повреждение кабеля связи;
неверно заданный адрес сообщения;
серьезные помехи в кабеле.
Оптимизация скорости в бодах;
проверка кабеля связи;
настройка правильного адреса сообщения;
замена кабеля или оптимизация защиты от помех.
ItE Проблемы с обнаружением тока. Некорректное подключение платы управления;
отсутствие вспомогательного напряжения;
выход из строя индикаторов тока.
Проверка разъема, датчиков и платы управления.
tE Ошибка автоматической настройки. Несоответствие мощностей двигателя и частотного преобразователя;
неверно заданные параметры электродвигателя;
серьезная разница между стандартными параметрами и параметрами автоматической настройки;
выход времени на автонастройку.
Установка параметров, указанных на шильдике двигателя;
снижение нагрузки на двигатель;
проверка параметров двигателя и его соединения;
установка верхнего предела частоты на уровень «выше 2/3 номинальной частоты».
bCE Неисправность тормозного модуля. Разрыв тормозных коммуникаций или некорректная работа тормозной цепи;
недостаток производительности внешнего тормозного резистора.
Проверка тормозного модуля и замена тормозных кабелей;
принудительное повышение мощности тормозного резистора.
ETH1, 2 Короткое замыкание Замыкание выхода преобразователя частоты «на землю»;
неисправность в цепи определения тока.
Проверка подключения двигателя и индикаторов тока;
замена платы управления.
dEu Отклонение скоростного режима. Избыточная нагрузка. Оптимизация нагрузки и увеличение времени обнаружения;
проверка и при необходимости корректировка параметров управления.
STo Несогласованность параметров. Отсутствие параметров управления для синхронных электродвигателей;
некорректно заданные параметры автоматической настройки;
отсутствие подключения частотника к двигателю.
Корректировка нагрузки на двигатель;
установка корректных параметров управления;
увеличение времени определения несогласованности.
PCE Обрыв связи с блоком управления. Повреждение проводов, обеспечивающих подключение к блоку управления;
помехи в проводах, связанные с внешним фактором;
некорректное функционирование цепи в основной плате и/или в клавиатуре.
Замена проводов блока управления;
проверка внешней среды и устранение источника помех;
выполнение комплексного сервисного обслуживания устройства.
END Сброс времени до заводских настроек. Фактическое время функционирования преобразователя не соответствует внутреннему параметру продолжительности работы. Корректировка настроек времени.
DNE Проблема с загрузкой параметров. Повреждение проводов, подключаемых к блоку управления;
помехи в проводах;
ошибка в базе данных панели управления.
Замена проводов блока управления;
сервисное обслуживание частотного преобразователя;
повторная загрузка данных в панель управления.

Преимущества ремонта в инженерной компании 555

  • Огромный опыт в ремонте частотных преобразователей разных моделей и марок.
  • Команда профессиональных специалистов.
  • Экономия до 70 % средств по сравнению с приобретением нового оборудования.
  • Оперативное выполнение работ (максимальный срок ремонта — 15 дней).
  • Бесплатная консультация и предварительный осмотр для определения ремонтопригодности привода.
  • Доступные цены и оплата только по результату работы.
  • Гарантия на отремонтированное оборудование — 12 месяцев.

Обращайтесь к нам из любой точки России, через сайт или по телефону. Промышленная электроника — это очень сложное и специфичное оборудование, которое следует доверять только профессионалам.

Мы ремонтируем:

Компания ООО «Барс-Гидравлик Групп»

Компания ООО «Барс-Гидравлик Групп» на протяжении нескольких лет успешно сотрудничает с ООО «Инженерная компания 555» в вопросах ремонта сложного промышленного оборудования. За время работы наш партнер зарекомендовал себя с самой лучшей стороны. Заказы выполняются в кротчайшие сроки при соблюдении высокого качества работ. Организация приема и выдачи заказов четкая. Гарантийные обязательства выполняются в полном объеме.

Выражаем благодарность Вашим специалистам за профессионализм и оперативное решение поставленных задач.

Особенно хочется отметить высокую клиентоориентированность персонала Вашей компании, готовность помочь в самых сложных ситуациях.

Мы высоко ценим сложившиеся между нашими компаниями открытые и доверительные партнерские отношения и искренне желаем «Инженерной компании «555» долгих лет успеха и процветания.

Читать весь
отзыв

ООО «СоюзМашМеталл»

ООО «Инженерная компания «555» оказывала нашей компании услуги по ремонту электродвигателей и проявила пунктуальность, аккуратность и ответственность в работе.

Результат выполненных работ говорит о качественном оборудовании и высококвалифицированных кадрах.

Сотрудники компании готовы выполнить новые для себя виды работ и оказать консультационные услуги, что характеризует их как профессионалов своего дела.

Рекомендуем ООО «ИК «555» как ответственного и надежного поставщика услуг.

Читать весь
отзыв

ООО «РСК»

Сообщаем, что наша организация сотрудничает с ООО «Инженерная компания «555» с мая 2016 года по настоящее время.

За этот период мы обращались к услугам компании более 10 раз.

Благодаря серьезному и квалифицированному подходу сотрудников ООО «Инженерная компания «555» ремонтные работы произведены качественно с учетом сроков, и обеспечены гарантийным сопровождением.

Планируем в дальнейшем работать с ООО «Инженерная компания «555»

Читать весь
отзыв

ОАО «Октябрьский электровагоноремонтный завод»

Уважаемый Дмитрий Васильевич!

ОАО «Октябрьский электровагоноремонтный завод» успешно работает с ООО «Инженерная компания «555» несколько лет, очень довольны данным сотрудничеством. В работе компании наибольшую ценность для нас представляет готовность работать на условиях, удобных Заказчику, качественный ремонт оборудования в заявленные сроки и самое главное, финансовая защищенность Заказчика. В инженерной компании работают внимательные, доброжелательные сотрудники, готовые в любой момент решить проблему Заказчика. Мы рады, что выбрали ООО «Инженерная компания «555» в качестве партнера. Гарантируем дальнейшее сотрудничество!

Читать весь
отзыв

ЗАО «ОХТИНСКОЕ»

ЗАО «Охтинское» выражает глубокую признательность и истинную благодарность ООО Инженерной компании «555» за качественную работу компании по ремонту сложного оборудования промышленной электроники, оперативность и технически грамотное отношение к работе в течении всего периода сотрудничества.

Мы надеемся на дальнейшее успешное развитие деловых отношений в сфере ремонта промышленной электроники.

Читать весь
отзыв

Преимущества сотрудничества с нами

Оплата только за результат — работающий блок

Гарантия на работоспособность блока целиком 12 месяцев

Срок ремонта от 5 до 15 дней

Бесплатный предварительный осмотр на предмет ремонтопригодности

Не вносим конструктивных изменений

Ремонт на компонентном уровне

Наша лаборатория расположена в Санкт-Петербурге, но обратиться за помощью вы можете из любой точки России.
Закажите обратный звонок или наберите в рабочее время многоканальный телефон

+7 (800) 555-89-01 (звонок по России бесплатный).

Расскажите о своей проблеме и получите инструкцию к дальнейшим действиям.

  • Contents

  • Table of Contents

  • Troubleshooting

  • Bookmarks

Quick Links

Instruction handbook

English

Language

Translation

Document No. 5.19015.01

Part No.

485487

Status

08-Jan-2020

E

5.19015.01

Read the Instruction handbook before starting any work!

b maXX 5000

Add-on modules

Modbus/TCP

MOD

loading

Related Manuals for Baumuller b maXX 5000 Series

Summary of Contents for Baumuller b maXX 5000 Series

  • Page 1
    Instruction handbook English Language Translation Document No. 5.19015.01 Part No. 485487 Status 08-Jan-2020 b maXX 5000 Add-on modules Modbus/TCP Read the Instruction handbook before starting any work! 5.19015.01…
  • Page 2
    Copyright These Instruction handbook may be copied by the owner in any quantity, but only for internal use. This Instruction handbook may not be copied or reproduced, in whole or in part, for any other purposes. The use and disclosure of information contained in these Instruction handbook are not per- mitted.
  • Page 3: Table Of Contents

    Table of Contents General …………..Information on this Instruction Handbook .

  • Page 4
    Table of Contents Commissioning/Operation ……….31 Safety notes .
  • Page 5: General

    ENERAL Information on this Instruction Handbook The manual b maXX 5000 add-on module MOD is an addition to the Instruction hand- book b maXX 5000 (5.09021) or b maXX 5500 (5.13008) for devices with Ethernet/IP Type code: BM5XXX-XXXX-XX08-00XX The basic prerequisite for safe working also is compliance with all the safety and handling instructions stated in the instruction handbooks b maXX 5000 or b maXX 5500.

  • Page 6: Key To Symbols

    Key to symbols Key to symbols Warning notes Warning notes are identified by symbols in this Instruction handbook. The notes are in- troduced by signal words that express the extent of the danger. It is imperative that these notes be complied with and are conscientiously regarded in or- der to prevent accidents, personal injury and material damage.

  • Page 7: Limitation Of Liability

    General Limitation of liability All specifications and notes in these instruction handbook were compiled taking into ac- count the applicable standards and regulations, the state of the art and our knowledge and experience of many years. The manufacturer assumes no liability for damages due to: m non-compliance with the instruction handbook m usage for other than the intended purpose m usage by untrained personnel…

  • Page 8: Other Applicable Documents

    Other applicable documents Other applicable documents Components of other manufacturers are integrated into the device. For these purchased parts, hazard assessments have been performed by the respective manufacturers. The compliance of the design construction with the applicable European and national regula- tions has been declared for the components by the respective manufacturers.

  • Page 9: 1.10 Used Terms

    General 1.10 Used terms A list of the abbreviations used can be found in b maXX 5000 (5.09021) or b maXX 5500 (5.13008), Appendix A: Abbreviations. 1.11 List of associated documentations Instruction Handbook Doc No. Part No. Part No. German English Instruction handbook b maXX 5000 5.09021…

  • Page 10
    1.11 List of associated documentations Instruction handbook b maXX 5000 add-on module MOD Document No.: 5.19015.01 Baumüller Nürnberg GmbH of 90…
  • Page 11: Safety

    AFETY This section provides an overview of all of the important safety aspects for optimum pro- tection of personnel as well as for the safe and problem-free operation. Contents of the Instruction Handbook Each person who is tasked with performing work on or with the device must have read and understood this Instruction Handbook and the Instruction Handbook of b maXX 5000 (5.09021) or b maXX 5500 (5.13008) before working with the device.

  • Page 12: Use, Compliant With Intended Purpose

    Use, compliant with intended purpose Use, compliant with intended purpose The Modbus/TCP add-on module is considered as being used compliant with its intend- ed purpose if all notes and information of this Instruction handbook and the Instruction handbook b maXX 5000 (5.09021) or b maXX 5500 (5.13008) are adhered to. WARNING! Danger arising from usage for an unintended purpose! Any usage that goes beyond the intended purpose and/or any non-compliant use of…

  • Page 13: Training Of The Personnel

    Safety Training of the personnel WARNING! Risk of injury due to insufficient qualifications! Improper handling can lead to significant personal injury and material damage. Therefore: m Certain activities can only be performed by the persons stated in the respective chapters of this Instruction handbook. In this Instruction handbook, the following qualifications are stipulated for various areas of activity: m Operating personnel…

  • Page 14: Special Hazards

    Special hazards Special hazards In the following section, the remaining marginal risks will be stated that have been iden- tified as a result of the hazard analysis. Observe the safety notes listed here and the warning notes in the further chapters of this manual to reduce health risks and dangerous situations.

  • Page 15: Fire Fighting

    Safety Moving components WARNING! Risk of injury from moving components! Rotating components and/or components moving linearly can result in severe injury. Therefore: m Do not touch moving components during operation. m Do not open any covering during operation. m The amount of residual mechanical energy depends on the application. Powered components still turn/move for a certain length of time even after the power supply has been switched off.

  • Page 16: Safety Equipment

    Safety equipment Safety equipment WARNING! Risk of fatal injury due to non-functional safety equipment! Safety equipment provides for the highest level of safety in a facility. Even if safety equipment makes work processes more awkward, under no circumstances may they be circumvented.

  • Page 17: Technical Data

    ECHNICAL Operation conditions The operation conditions of b maXX 5000 are valid, see Instruction Handbook b maXX 5000 (5.09021) or b maXX 5500 (5.13008). Transport temperature range — 25 °C to + 70 °C Transport climatic class 2 K 3 EN 60721-3-2 Storage temperature range — 25 °C to + 70 °C…

  • Page 18: Electrical Data

    Electrical data Electrical data 3.2.1 Modbus/TCP, 2 channels ± Supply voltage (external supply) 5 % (without load) Supply current (external supply) max. 100 mA (without load) Signal level: output high voltage at I = — 20 mA 2,5 V Signal level: output high voltage at I = + 20 mA 0,5 V Output frequency, track signals…

  • Page 19: Design And Operation

    PERATION Design The b maXX 5000 series consists of an (active) mains rectifier unit and one or more axis units or a basic unit with/without axis units. The possible number of axis units depends on the connected load of the DC link of the mains rectifier unit or is limited by the signal bus to a maximum of 12 axis units.

  • Page 20: Add-On Module Eip

    Add-on module EIP Add-on module EIP NOTE! Only devices with type code BM5XXX-XXXX-XX08-00XX provide the add-on module Modbus/TCP The module is built-in and cannot be changed. It is forbidden to remove the yellow front cover. The Modbus/TCP provides 2 channels . Modbus Modbus Channel 1…

  • Page 21: Identification Of The Device

    Design and Operation Identification of the device 4.3.1 Part number Figure 3: Part number — front Instruction handbook b maXX 5000 add-on module MOD Document No.: 5.19015.01 of 90…

  • Page 22: Type Plate

    Identification of the device 4.3.2 Type plate Examples of the locations where the type plate is affixed are shown in the figure. Among other things, the type plate also shows the type code of the device. Figure 4: Location of the type plate Instruction handbook b maXX 5000 add-on module MOD Document No.: 5.19015.01 Baumüller Nürnberg GmbH…

  • Page 23: Danger Areas

    Design and Operation 4.3.3 Danger areas Please comply to all safety notes of the instruction handbooks of b maXX 5000 or b maXX 5500. Display and operation elements The add-on module Modbus/TCP (MOD) doesn’t provide display or operation elements. The LED H14 and H24 of b maXX 5000 / b maXX 5500 and the emulation of the LED in ProDrive displays all device errors, even the errors occurring in connection with the add- on modules IEE or MOD.

  • Page 24
    Display and operation elements Instruction handbook b maXX 5000 add-on module MOD Document No.: 5.19015.01 Baumüller Nürnberg GmbH of 90…
  • Page 25: Installation

    NSTALLATION This chapter describes the electrical installation of the b maXX 5000 add-on module MOD. Safety notes DANGER! Risk of fatal injury from electrical current! Inevitably, when operating this electrical device, certain parts of it are energized with hazardous voltage. Therefore: m Pay heed to areas on the device that could be dangerous during the electrical in- stallation.

  • Page 26: Demands On The Power Supply

    Demands on the power supply Demands on the power supply In order to comply with the standard EN 60 204-1 (electrical equipment of machines), the cable specified therein must be used. The connecting plugs must not drop — otherwise there is a danger of short circuits, external voltage, etc. NOTICE! The danger is: electrical voltage.

  • Page 27: Installation

    Installation Installation 5.4.1 Connection diagram IEE Example 1 Example 2: Example 3: m Set value IEE from encoder m Set value IEE from encoder m Set value IEE from master control m Signal IEE to following axis m Signal IEE to master control m Signal IEE to following axis FELDBUS FIELDBUS…

  • Page 28: Installation Procedure Iee

    Installation 5.4.2 Installation procedure IEE Depending on the desired application you now are able to connect the incremental en- coder emulation with further system components (see ZFigure 5– on page 27). 1 Make sure that the b maXX BM5000 has been switched off voltage. 2 Connect an output (e.g.

  • Page 29: Pin Assignment Iee

    Installation 5.4.3 Pin assignment IEE Pin assignment of the Sub-D connectors (male) at the front of the Ethernet/IP slave EIP: Pin assignment Pin No. Meaning Channel 1 Ground incremental encoder emulation Channel 1 External power supply +5 V IEE Channel 1 Incremental encoder emulation track 0 Channel 1 Incremental encoder emulation track -0 Channel 1 Incremental encoder emulation track B Channel 1 Incremental encoder emulation track -A…

  • Page 30: Connection Cable Iee With B Maxx 5000

    Installation NOTE! If both channels are used, a second cable with a further 26-pole sub D connector must be led through the 25-pole sub D connector (cable is splitted). View on solder pin side Æ 0.34 mm² Æ 0.34 mm² Channel 1 Æ…

  • Page 31: Commissioning/Operation

    OMMISSIONING PERATION The commissioning ensures that the b maXX 5000 add-on module MOD was correctly detected and that it operates. For further information on commissioning and parameter- ization see parameter handbook b maXX 5000. The following conditions must be complied with before commissioning: 1 Wiring of the Modbus/TCP (MOD) is done properly (MOD as shown in example in ZFigure 5–…

  • Page 32: Commissioning Procedure Iee

    Commissioning procedure IEE Commissioning procedure IEE The commissioning is divided into the following tasks: 1 Recognition of the incremental encoder emulation IEE 2 Configuring the incremental encoder emulation IEE 3 Testing the function 6.2.1 Recognition of the incremental encoder emulation IEE While starting the device, the controller reads out the identifier of the incremental encoder emulation(s) automatically.

  • Page 33: Drive Management, Reset Errors

    Commissioning/Operation 4 Select sub-menu „Axis 1/management“ and reset any faults/error messages eventually existing in the b maXX 5000. These errors possibly were caused by faulty mounting (e.g. defect cables) or faulty in- stallation (e.g. missing voltage supply). After the errors were removed commissioning can be continued.

  • Page 34: Drive Management, Iee Cannot Be Identified

    Commissioning procedure IEE If the b maXX 5000 add-on module MOD has not been identified as correct or if it is not available, following error message is generated after activating the incremental encoder emulation. Figure 10: Drive management, IEE cannot be identified NOTE All error parameters of the incremental encoder emulation can be found in chapter ZTroubleshooting and fault correction–…

  • Page 35: Parameter Setting Iee

    Commissioning/Operation 6.2.2 Parameter setting IEE The parameter setting influences the behavior of the incremental encoder emulation IEE while operating. The parameters are set in ProDrive. 1 Open ProDrive „Navigation“ 2 Choose in configuration/Encoder emulation „Encoder emulation 1“ or „Encoder emulation 2“ Figure 11: ProDrive, encoder emulation 3 In window „Encoder emulation 1“…

  • Page 36: Function Test Iee

    Commissioning procedure IEE 6.2.3 Function test IEE The incremental encoder emulation can be tested with b maXX 5000, motor and encoder, only. Requirements Drive is in operating state (see parameter manual b maXX 5000). Encoder 1 connect- ed with X7 Encoder 1 for motor control. b maXX 5000 switched off again after successful first commissioning.

  • Page 37: Encoder Emulation 1 — Settings

    Commissioning/Operation All values and selections must be made according following ZFigure 15– in this win- dow. The settings correspond with the signal of a square wave incremental encoder with 1024 increments. Mode (172.1) Figure 15: Encoder emulation 1 — settings This corresponds with the following settings of the parameter list.

  • Page 38: Window Encoder 2 — Configuration

    Commissioning procedure IEE Choose in ProDrive Navigation „Configuration/Encoder/Encoder 2“ Set all values and selections according ZFigure 16– in this window. Figure 16: Window Encoder 2 — Configuration 10 Choose in ProDrive Navigation „Set value generator/Ramp function generator“. Figure 17: Window Ramp function generator 11 Set following parameters: m Ramp function generator input h Set value „10“…

  • Page 39: Ramp Function Generator — Window With Drive Manager Dialog

    Commissioning/Operation 12 Click to the icon „Drive management“. In addition window „Drive manager dialog“ appears. Figure 18: Ramp function generator — window with drive manager dialog 13 Select in scroll list (1) the operation mode „Speed control“ 14 Switch on Pulse enable and No Quickstop 15 Click on button „Start“…

  • Page 40
    Commissioning procedure IEE 18 Choose in ProDrive Navigation „Configuration/Encoder/Encoder 2“. 19 In this window: Speed smoothed: approx. 10 % NOTE If the generated signal of the add-on module MOD is processed in a higher level control, please check the position values there. Stop the drive after having checked the proper functioning of the add-on module MOD: h Click on „Stop“…
  • Page 41: General Description

    ENERAL ESCRIPTION Configure IP address The IP address either can be configured via ProDrive permanently or defined via the field- bus by DHCP or BOOTP. Static IP addresses can be assigned via the ProDrive only. Via the fieldbus statical IP addresses as well as DHCP or BOOTP addresses can be as- signed.

  • Page 42: Accept The Ip Address Of Prodrive

    Configure IP address 7.1.1 Accept the IP address of ProDrive As long as from the IP address settings in ProDrive no host IP address of 0 results the IP settings in ProDrive for Modbus/TCP are accepted 1:1 Example 1: Network IP 192.168.1, host IP 21 via manually input Via the following settings the device can be configured to the IP address 192.168.1.21 Figure 19: Manual input…

  • Page 43: Setting Via The Dip Switch

    General Description Example 2: Network IP 17 via dip switch Via the following settings the device can be configured to the IP address 192.168.0.17 Figure 20: Setting via the dip switch Instruction handbook b maXX 5000 add-on module MOD Document No.: 5.19015.01 of 90…

  • Page 44: Accept Ip Setting Of Fieldbus

    Configure IP address 7.1.2 Accept IP setting of fieldbus So that the fieldbus can control the IP settings via the ProDrive settings the host IP must be 0. Then the IP settings can be made via DHCP or BOOTP. Example 3: Host IP = 0 via the dip switch All dip switches are on 0: Figure 21: Settings of the fieldbus…

  • Page 45: Modbus Function Codes

    General Description Modbus function codes The Modbus/TCP add on module supports word access (16 bits) to Modbus register, on- The following function codes are supported: Function code Meaning Read multiple register (WORD access) Read input register (WORD access) Write single register (WORD access) FC16 Write multiple register (WORD access) FC23…

  • Page 46: Process Data Mapping

    Process data (cyclic communication) 7.3.1 Process data mapping The process data mapping of the b maXX 5000 can be configured by the Modbus register 210 — 337 (actual process data mapping) and register 410 — 537 (set process data map- ping).

  • Page 47
    General Description Mapping b maXX 5000 Single axis: Modbus Name Access Meaning register Actual PDO Mapping 0 Read- FB of the parameter, which is mapped on the first digit of the Write actual values. (Modbus address 2-3) Actual PDO Mapping 0 Read- PNR of the parameter, which is mapped on the first digit of the Write…
  • Page 48
    Process data (cyclic communication) Modbus Name Access Meaning register Set PDO Mapping 1 Read- Axis of the parameter, which is mapped on the second digit of axis Write the set values. (Modbus address 104-105) … Set PDO Mapping 15 Read- FB of the parameter, which is mapped on the last digit of the Write set values.
  • Page 49
    General Description Modbus Name Access Meaning register Set PDO Mapping 0 Read- FB of the parameter, which is mapped on the first digit of the Write set values. (Modbus address 102-103) Set PDO Mapping 0 Read- PNR of the parameter, which is mapped on the first digit of the Write set values.
  • Page 50: Cycle Time Of The Process Data

    Process data (cyclic communication) Example Two parameter should be mapped on the actual process data and a parameter should be mapped on the set process data. Actual process data (Actual PDO): PDO 0: FB = 126; PNR = 61; FBI = 0; first axis PDO 1: FB = 126;…

  • Page 51: Process Data Exchange

    General Description 7.3.3 Process data exchange The b maXX process data can be read by Modbus register 2 to 65 (actual process data) and can be wirtten by Modus register 102 to 165 (set process data). The parameters are selected depending on the process data mapping (see ZProcess data mapping–…

  • Page 52
    Process data (cyclic communication) Process data b maXX 5000 Double axis: Range Modbus Name Access Meaning register Actual 2 – 3 Actual Read-only First 32 bit Actual process data object. Depending on process data PDO 0 configured mapping. 4 – 5 Actual Read-only Second 32 bit Actual process data object.
  • Page 53: Status Word And Control Word

    General Description Status word and Control word 7.4.1 Status word The system state and the error state can be requested in the status word. The status word and the actual process data can be transmitted withing the same Modbus function code because the status word is in Modbus register 0 directly previous to the actual process data.

  • Page 54: Control Word

    Status word and Control word 7.4.2 Control word The system state can be changed and the error states acknowledged via the control word. The control word and the set process data can be transmitted withing the same Modbus function code because the control word is in Modbus register 100 directly previ- ous to the set process data.

  • Page 55: Service Data (Acyclic Communication)

    General Description Service data (acyclic communication) Independent to the process data the Modbus/TCP has access to all b maXX parameters. The Modbus register 600 — 652 is used: Modbus Name Access Meaning register F: Format Read- Permissible values: 0, 1 Write DS: Data set Read-…

  • Page 56: Example Service Data Communication

    Service data (acyclic communication) The data of register 611 to max. 650 (depending on the length setting in register 610) is written to the selected parameter in case of an writing access to register 611. The b maXX firstly writes all values to the Modbus register and after that copies the values to the selected parameters in case of writing access to register 611 — 6xx with the function code «Write multiple register».

  • Page 57: States Of Communication

    General Description States of communication 7.6.1 Pre-Operational In state Pre-Operational the device can be configured and an access to the controller pa- rameters via register range 600 — 652 is possible. No parameters are mapped to the process data register. 7.6.2 Operational With the transition Pre-Operational to Operational the cyclic communication is parame-…

  • Page 58: Actual Value Watchdog

    Controller timeout 7.7.1 Actual Value Watchdog m The actual value watchdog is configured by Modbus register 203 m A value of 0 deactivates the watchdog m A value not equal 0 corresponds with the watchdog time in ms m The watchdog can be configured in state Pre-Operational only m The watchdog timer is restarted with the configured value in ms with every reading of the status word in state Operational.

  • Page 59: Project Example Schneider Electric Unity Pros

    ROJECT EXAMPLE CHNEIDER LECTRIC NITY P34 2020 ODICON The b maXX 5000 was configured to the IP address 192.168.1.20 to demonstrate the fol- lowing examples. Instruction handbook b maXX 5000 add-on module MOD Document No.: 5.19015.01 of 90…

  • Page 60: Create Projects Using The Corresponding Modbus Client

    Create projects using the corresponding Modbus client Create projects using the corresponding Modbus client Instruction handbook b maXX 5000 add-on module MOD Document No.: 5.19015.01 Baumüller Nürnberg GmbH of 90…

  • Page 61: Add Modbus Tcp Network

    Project example SCHNEIDER ELECTRIC UNITY PRO S Add Modbus TCP Network Instruction handbook b maXX 5000 add-on module MOD Document No.: 5.19015.01 of 90…

  • Page 62
    Add Modbus TCP Network The model series and the IP address configuration of the Modbus TCP Client must be set in network settings. The address of the Modbus TCP Client is set via a DHCP Server in this example.The IP address of the Modbus TCP Client is set to 192.168.1.10 by the DHCP Server.
  • Page 63
    Project example SCHNEIDER ELECTRIC UNITY PRO S The provided network connection of the Ethernet interface must be assigned in the Ether- net configuration of the Modbus TCP Client. Instruction handbook b maXX 5000 add-on module MOD Document No.: 5.19015.01 of 90…
  • Page 64
    Add Modbus TCP Network Instruction handbook b maXX 5000 add-on module MOD Document No.: 5.19015.01 Baumüller Nürnberg GmbH of 90…
  • Page 65: Create Program

    Project example SCHNEIDER ELECTRIC UNITY PRO S Create program The variables used in the program must be defined. Instruction handbook b maXX 5000 add-on module MOD Document No.: 5.19015.01 of 90…

  • Page 66
    Create program The use of dynamic arrays must be activated within the project settings. Instruction handbook b maXX 5000 add-on module MOD Document No.: 5.19015.01 Baumüller Nürnberg GmbH of 90…
  • Page 67
    Project example SCHNEIDER ELECTRIC UNITY PRO S Instruction handbook b maXX 5000 add-on module MOD Document No.: 5.19015.01 of 90…
  • Page 68
    Create program A new program can be generated now. In this example a program with structured text (ST) is generated. A cyclic communication with 4 ms is configured on Modbus TCP Server with address 192.168.1.20. The parameters 126.1 of axis 1 and axis 2 are mapped cyclically as actual and set pro- cess data Furthermore the parameter 126.63 of axis 1 and the parameter 126.64 of axis 2 are writ- ten and read acyclically.
  • Page 69
    Project example SCHNEIDER ELECTRIC UNITY PRO S Instruction handbook b maXX 5000 add-on module MOD Document No.: 5.19015.01 of 90…
  • Page 70
    Create program Instruction handbook b maXX 5000 add-on module MOD Document No.: 5.19015.01 Baumüller Nürnberg GmbH of 90…
  • Page 71
    Project example SCHNEIDER ELECTRIC UNITY PRO S (*—-Init variables—-start*) state = 0 then addressParam := ADDM(‘Ethernet_1{192.168.1.20}’); accessParams[0] := 0; accessParams[1] := 0; accessParams[2] := 2; (*Modbus access timeout in 100ms -> 200ms*) accessParams[3] := 0; (*Set timings*) fieldbusCycleTime := 4000; (*4000µs*) inputWatchdogTime := 80;…
  • Page 72
    Create program acyclicData[12] := 0; axis := 1; state := state + 1; (*—-Init variables—-end*) (*—-Set b maXX to PreOp—-start*) elsif state = 1 then (*Set control word to 16#3E -> go to PreOp and reset all errors*) outputData[0] := 16#3E; WRITE_VAR(addressParam, ‘%MW’, 100, 1, outputData, accessParams);…
  • Page 73
    Project example SCHNEIDER ELECTRIC UNITY PRO S WRITE_VAR (addressParam, ‘%MW’, 410, 12, outMapping, accessParams); (*Maximal 120 WORD*) state := state + 1; elsif state = 6 then (*WRITE_VAR was finished?*) accessParams[0].0 = false then (*Was any error while WRITE_VAR?*) accessParams[1] <> 0 then (*Error happened ->…
  • Page 74
    Create program := ‘%MW’, := 100, := 62, EMIS := outputData, GEST := accessParams); state := state + 1; elsif state = 10 then (*WRITE_VAR was finished?*) accessParams[0].0 = false then (*Was any error while WRITE_VAR?*) accessParams[1] <> 0 then (*Error happened ->…
  • Page 75
    Project example SCHNEIDER ELECTRIC UNITY PRO S inputData[0].2 = true then (*Output data watchdog expired -> reset the error by setting the same bit in control word*) outputData[0].2 := true; else outputData[0].2 := false; end_if; inputData[0].3 = true then (*Input data timeout in b maXX ->…
  • Page 76
    Create program (*Was any error while WRITE_VAR?*) accessParams[1] <> 0 then (*Error happened -> go to error state*) state := 100; else state := state + 1; end_if; end_if; (*—-Do acyclic communication write—-end*) (*—-Do acyclic communication read—-start*) elsif state = 16 then axis = 1 then…
  • Page 77: Create User Window

    Project example SCHNEIDER ELECTRIC UNITY PRO S Create User Window Cyclic and acyclic parameters can be displayed in a user window Instruction handbook b maXX 5000 add-on module MOD Document No.: 5.19015.01 of 90…

  • Page 78
    Create User Window Instruction handbook b maXX 5000 add-on module MOD Document No.: 5.19015.01 Baumüller Nürnberg GmbH of 90…
  • Page 79: Transfer Project To Plc

    Project example SCHNEIDER ELECTRIC UNITY PRO S Transfer project to PLC The project can be transmitted to the PLC and the programm can be started then. Instruction handbook b maXX 5000 add-on module MOD Document No.: 5.19015.01 of 90…

  • Page 80
    Transfer project to PLC The project can be started with the commands SPS  Connect SPS  Transmit project to PLC SPS  Start The counters of the corresponding input arrays of the user window are incremented. Instruction handbook b maXX 5000 add-on module MOD Document No.: 5.19015.01 Baumüller Nürnberg GmbH of 90…
  • Page 81: Troubleshooting And Fault Correction

    ROUBLESHOOTING AND FAULT CORRECTION Behavior in case of malfunctions Basic information DANGER! Risk of fatal injury from electrical current! Inevitably, when operating this electrical device, certain parts of it are energized with hazardous voltage. Therefore: m Pay heed to areas on the device that could be dangerous. WARNING! Risk of injury due to improper fault correction! Therefore:…

  • Page 82: Error Detection

    Error detection Error detection The fault can be caused by mechanical or electrical malfunctions. The occurrence of an error state is signalized by the lighting up of the red LED H14 or H24 on the front side of the housing. NOTE! In case of warnings or errors without error reactions, the LEDs H14 or H24 blink „Malfunction“.

  • Page 83: Error Handling

    Troubleshooting and fault correction Error handling NOTE! The device is provided with predefined error reactions. You are able to set the error reaction of the device in „Depending on settings“ in the column „Reaction“ marked er- ror messages. An exception here are errors, which have to have an immediate pulse inhibit as a consequence.

  • Page 84: Error Messages

    Error handling 9.3.2 Error messages In the column „Reaction“ the reaction of the system to the error is shown: m „adjustable“ = the error reaction can be set via ProDrive (Window „Drive management“, toolbar button „Error reaction“). Error Error description Reaction Troubleshooting Configuration error,…

  • Page 85: Table Of Figures

    Table of Figures Table of Figures Pulse cycles, incremental encoder emulation IEE …………..Front view add-on module EIP………………..Part number — front ……………………Location of the type plate ………………….Connection diagram incremental encoder emulation IEE …………Connection cable IEE with b maXX 5000 ……………… .ProDrive Navigation ……………………

  • Page 86
    Table of Figures Instruction handbook b maXX 5000 add-on module MOD Document No.: 5.19015.01 Baumüller Nürnberg GmbH of 90…
  • Page 87: Index

    Index Accidents Note Active mains rectifier unit Notice Axis unit Axis unit safety Operating personnel Operation Caution Output signals Commissioning procedure Connection diagram Parameter list Customer service Part number Personnel, qualified Danger Personnel, training Danger areas Pin assignment DC link discharge time ProDrive, Start Disposal Quit errors…

  • Page 88
    Index Instruction handbook b maXX 5000 add-on module MOD Document No.: 5.19015.01 Baumüller Nürnberg GmbH of 90…
  • Page 89: Survey Of Revisions

    Survey of Revisions Survey of Revisions Version Edition Changes 5.19015.01 14-Jan-2020 First issue Instruction handbook b maXX 5000 add-on module MOD Document No.: 5.19015.01 of 90…

  • Page 90
    Notes Instruction handbook b maXX 5000 add-on module MOD Document No.: 5.19015.01 Baumüller Nürnberg GmbH of 90…
  • Page 92
    Baumüller Nürnberg GmbH Ostendstraße 80-90 90482 Nürnberg T: +49(0)911-5432-0 F: +49(0)911-5432-130 www.baumueller.com All information given in this manual is customer information, subject to change without notice. We reserve the right to futher develop and actualize our products continuously using our permanent revision service. Please notice, that specifications/data/information are current values according to the printing date. These statements are not legally binding according to the measurement, computation and calculations.

  • Contents

  • Table of Contents

  • Troubleshooting

  • Bookmarks

Quick Links

Instruction handbook

English

Language

Translation

Document No. 5.19015.01

Part No.

485487

Status

08-Jan-2020

E

5.19015.01

Read the Instruction handbook before starting any work!

b maXX 5000

Add-on modules

Modbus/TCP

MOD

loading

Related Manuals for Baumuller b maXX 5000 Series

Summary of Contents for Baumuller b maXX 5000 Series

  • Page 1
    Instruction handbook English Language Translation Document No. 5.19015.01 Part No. 485487 Status 08-Jan-2020 b maXX 5000 Add-on modules Modbus/TCP Read the Instruction handbook before starting any work! 5.19015.01…
  • Page 2
    Copyright These Instruction handbook may be copied by the owner in any quantity, but only for internal use. This Instruction handbook may not be copied or reproduced, in whole or in part, for any other purposes. The use and disclosure of information contained in these Instruction handbook are not per- mitted.
  • Page 3: Table Of Contents

    Table of Contents General …………..Information on this Instruction Handbook .

  • Page 4
    Table of Contents Commissioning/Operation ……….31 Safety notes .
  • Page 5: General

    ENERAL Information on this Instruction Handbook The manual b maXX 5000 add-on module MOD is an addition to the Instruction hand- book b maXX 5000 (5.09021) or b maXX 5500 (5.13008) for devices with Ethernet/IP Type code: BM5XXX-XXXX-XX08-00XX The basic prerequisite for safe working also is compliance with all the safety and handling instructions stated in the instruction handbooks b maXX 5000 or b maXX 5500.

  • Page 6: Key To Symbols

    Key to symbols Key to symbols Warning notes Warning notes are identified by symbols in this Instruction handbook. The notes are in- troduced by signal words that express the extent of the danger. It is imperative that these notes be complied with and are conscientiously regarded in or- der to prevent accidents, personal injury and material damage.

  • Page 7: Limitation Of Liability

    General Limitation of liability All specifications and notes in these instruction handbook were compiled taking into ac- count the applicable standards and regulations, the state of the art and our knowledge and experience of many years. The manufacturer assumes no liability for damages due to: m non-compliance with the instruction handbook m usage for other than the intended purpose m usage by untrained personnel…

  • Page 8: Other Applicable Documents

    Other applicable documents Other applicable documents Components of other manufacturers are integrated into the device. For these purchased parts, hazard assessments have been performed by the respective manufacturers. The compliance of the design construction with the applicable European and national regula- tions has been declared for the components by the respective manufacturers.

  • Page 9: 1.10 Used Terms

    General 1.10 Used terms A list of the abbreviations used can be found in b maXX 5000 (5.09021) or b maXX 5500 (5.13008), Appendix A: Abbreviations. 1.11 List of associated documentations Instruction Handbook Doc No. Part No. Part No. German English Instruction handbook b maXX 5000 5.09021…

  • Page 10
    1.11 List of associated documentations Instruction handbook b maXX 5000 add-on module MOD Document No.: 5.19015.01 Baumüller Nürnberg GmbH of 90…
  • Page 11: Safety

    AFETY This section provides an overview of all of the important safety aspects for optimum pro- tection of personnel as well as for the safe and problem-free operation. Contents of the Instruction Handbook Each person who is tasked with performing work on or with the device must have read and understood this Instruction Handbook and the Instruction Handbook of b maXX 5000 (5.09021) or b maXX 5500 (5.13008) before working with the device.

  • Page 12: Use, Compliant With Intended Purpose

    Use, compliant with intended purpose Use, compliant with intended purpose The Modbus/TCP add-on module is considered as being used compliant with its intend- ed purpose if all notes and information of this Instruction handbook and the Instruction handbook b maXX 5000 (5.09021) or b maXX 5500 (5.13008) are adhered to. WARNING! Danger arising from usage for an unintended purpose! Any usage that goes beyond the intended purpose and/or any non-compliant use of…

  • Page 13: Training Of The Personnel

    Safety Training of the personnel WARNING! Risk of injury due to insufficient qualifications! Improper handling can lead to significant personal injury and material damage. Therefore: m Certain activities can only be performed by the persons stated in the respective chapters of this Instruction handbook. In this Instruction handbook, the following qualifications are stipulated for various areas of activity: m Operating personnel…

  • Page 14: Special Hazards

    Special hazards Special hazards In the following section, the remaining marginal risks will be stated that have been iden- tified as a result of the hazard analysis. Observe the safety notes listed here and the warning notes in the further chapters of this manual to reduce health risks and dangerous situations.

  • Page 15: Fire Fighting

    Safety Moving components WARNING! Risk of injury from moving components! Rotating components and/or components moving linearly can result in severe injury. Therefore: m Do not touch moving components during operation. m Do not open any covering during operation. m The amount of residual mechanical energy depends on the application. Powered components still turn/move for a certain length of time even after the power supply has been switched off.

  • Page 16: Safety Equipment

    Safety equipment Safety equipment WARNING! Risk of fatal injury due to non-functional safety equipment! Safety equipment provides for the highest level of safety in a facility. Even if safety equipment makes work processes more awkward, under no circumstances may they be circumvented.

  • Page 17: Technical Data

    ECHNICAL Operation conditions The operation conditions of b maXX 5000 are valid, see Instruction Handbook b maXX 5000 (5.09021) or b maXX 5500 (5.13008). Transport temperature range — 25 °C to + 70 °C Transport climatic class 2 K 3 EN 60721-3-2 Storage temperature range — 25 °C to + 70 °C…

  • Page 18: Electrical Data

    Electrical data Electrical data 3.2.1 Modbus/TCP, 2 channels ± Supply voltage (external supply) 5 % (without load) Supply current (external supply) max. 100 mA (without load) Signal level: output high voltage at I = — 20 mA 2,5 V Signal level: output high voltage at I = + 20 mA 0,5 V Output frequency, track signals…

  • Page 19: Design And Operation

    PERATION Design The b maXX 5000 series consists of an (active) mains rectifier unit and one or more axis units or a basic unit with/without axis units. The possible number of axis units depends on the connected load of the DC link of the mains rectifier unit or is limited by the signal bus to a maximum of 12 axis units.

  • Page 20: Add-On Module Eip

    Add-on module EIP Add-on module EIP NOTE! Only devices with type code BM5XXX-XXXX-XX08-00XX provide the add-on module Modbus/TCP The module is built-in and cannot be changed. It is forbidden to remove the yellow front cover. The Modbus/TCP provides 2 channels . Modbus Modbus Channel 1…

  • Page 21: Identification Of The Device

    Design and Operation Identification of the device 4.3.1 Part number Figure 3: Part number — front Instruction handbook b maXX 5000 add-on module MOD Document No.: 5.19015.01 of 90…

  • Page 22: Type Plate

    Identification of the device 4.3.2 Type plate Examples of the locations where the type plate is affixed are shown in the figure. Among other things, the type plate also shows the type code of the device. Figure 4: Location of the type plate Instruction handbook b maXX 5000 add-on module MOD Document No.: 5.19015.01 Baumüller Nürnberg GmbH…

  • Page 23: Danger Areas

    Design and Operation 4.3.3 Danger areas Please comply to all safety notes of the instruction handbooks of b maXX 5000 or b maXX 5500. Display and operation elements The add-on module Modbus/TCP (MOD) doesn’t provide display or operation elements. The LED H14 and H24 of b maXX 5000 / b maXX 5500 and the emulation of the LED in ProDrive displays all device errors, even the errors occurring in connection with the add- on modules IEE or MOD.

  • Page 24
    Display and operation elements Instruction handbook b maXX 5000 add-on module MOD Document No.: 5.19015.01 Baumüller Nürnberg GmbH of 90…
  • Page 25: Installation

    NSTALLATION This chapter describes the electrical installation of the b maXX 5000 add-on module MOD. Safety notes DANGER! Risk of fatal injury from electrical current! Inevitably, when operating this electrical device, certain parts of it are energized with hazardous voltage. Therefore: m Pay heed to areas on the device that could be dangerous during the electrical in- stallation.

  • Page 26: Demands On The Power Supply

    Demands on the power supply Demands on the power supply In order to comply with the standard EN 60 204-1 (electrical equipment of machines), the cable specified therein must be used. The connecting plugs must not drop — otherwise there is a danger of short circuits, external voltage, etc. NOTICE! The danger is: electrical voltage.

  • Page 27: Installation

    Installation Installation 5.4.1 Connection diagram IEE Example 1 Example 2: Example 3: m Set value IEE from encoder m Set value IEE from encoder m Set value IEE from master control m Signal IEE to following axis m Signal IEE to master control m Signal IEE to following axis FELDBUS FIELDBUS…

  • Page 28: Installation Procedure Iee

    Installation 5.4.2 Installation procedure IEE Depending on the desired application you now are able to connect the incremental en- coder emulation with further system components (see ZFigure 5– on page 27). 1 Make sure that the b maXX BM5000 has been switched off voltage. 2 Connect an output (e.g.

  • Page 29: Pin Assignment Iee

    Installation 5.4.3 Pin assignment IEE Pin assignment of the Sub-D connectors (male) at the front of the Ethernet/IP slave EIP: Pin assignment Pin No. Meaning Channel 1 Ground incremental encoder emulation Channel 1 External power supply +5 V IEE Channel 1 Incremental encoder emulation track 0 Channel 1 Incremental encoder emulation track -0 Channel 1 Incremental encoder emulation track B Channel 1 Incremental encoder emulation track -A…

  • Page 30: Connection Cable Iee With B Maxx 5000

    Installation NOTE! If both channels are used, a second cable with a further 26-pole sub D connector must be led through the 25-pole sub D connector (cable is splitted). View on solder pin side Æ 0.34 mm² Æ 0.34 mm² Channel 1 Æ…

  • Page 31: Commissioning/Operation

    OMMISSIONING PERATION The commissioning ensures that the b maXX 5000 add-on module MOD was correctly detected and that it operates. For further information on commissioning and parameter- ization see parameter handbook b maXX 5000. The following conditions must be complied with before commissioning: 1 Wiring of the Modbus/TCP (MOD) is done properly (MOD as shown in example in ZFigure 5–…

  • Page 32: Commissioning Procedure Iee

    Commissioning procedure IEE Commissioning procedure IEE The commissioning is divided into the following tasks: 1 Recognition of the incremental encoder emulation IEE 2 Configuring the incremental encoder emulation IEE 3 Testing the function 6.2.1 Recognition of the incremental encoder emulation IEE While starting the device, the controller reads out the identifier of the incremental encoder emulation(s) automatically.

  • Page 33: Drive Management, Reset Errors

    Commissioning/Operation 4 Select sub-menu „Axis 1/management“ and reset any faults/error messages eventually existing in the b maXX 5000. These errors possibly were caused by faulty mounting (e.g. defect cables) or faulty in- stallation (e.g. missing voltage supply). After the errors were removed commissioning can be continued.

  • Page 34: Drive Management, Iee Cannot Be Identified

    Commissioning procedure IEE If the b maXX 5000 add-on module MOD has not been identified as correct or if it is not available, following error message is generated after activating the incremental encoder emulation. Figure 10: Drive management, IEE cannot be identified NOTE All error parameters of the incremental encoder emulation can be found in chapter ZTroubleshooting and fault correction–…

  • Page 35: Parameter Setting Iee

    Commissioning/Operation 6.2.2 Parameter setting IEE The parameter setting influences the behavior of the incremental encoder emulation IEE while operating. The parameters are set in ProDrive. 1 Open ProDrive „Navigation“ 2 Choose in configuration/Encoder emulation „Encoder emulation 1“ or „Encoder emulation 2“ Figure 11: ProDrive, encoder emulation 3 In window „Encoder emulation 1“…

  • Page 36: Function Test Iee

    Commissioning procedure IEE 6.2.3 Function test IEE The incremental encoder emulation can be tested with b maXX 5000, motor and encoder, only. Requirements Drive is in operating state (see parameter manual b maXX 5000). Encoder 1 connect- ed with X7 Encoder 1 for motor control. b maXX 5000 switched off again after successful first commissioning.

  • Page 37: Encoder Emulation 1 — Settings

    Commissioning/Operation All values and selections must be made according following ZFigure 15– in this win- dow. The settings correspond with the signal of a square wave incremental encoder with 1024 increments. Mode (172.1) Figure 15: Encoder emulation 1 — settings This corresponds with the following settings of the parameter list.

  • Page 38: Window Encoder 2 — Configuration

    Commissioning procedure IEE Choose in ProDrive Navigation „Configuration/Encoder/Encoder 2“ Set all values and selections according ZFigure 16– in this window. Figure 16: Window Encoder 2 — Configuration 10 Choose in ProDrive Navigation „Set value generator/Ramp function generator“. Figure 17: Window Ramp function generator 11 Set following parameters: m Ramp function generator input h Set value „10“…

  • Page 39: Ramp Function Generator — Window With Drive Manager Dialog

    Commissioning/Operation 12 Click to the icon „Drive management“. In addition window „Drive manager dialog“ appears. Figure 18: Ramp function generator — window with drive manager dialog 13 Select in scroll list (1) the operation mode „Speed control“ 14 Switch on Pulse enable and No Quickstop 15 Click on button „Start“…

  • Page 40
    Commissioning procedure IEE 18 Choose in ProDrive Navigation „Configuration/Encoder/Encoder 2“. 19 In this window: Speed smoothed: approx. 10 % NOTE If the generated signal of the add-on module MOD is processed in a higher level control, please check the position values there. Stop the drive after having checked the proper functioning of the add-on module MOD: h Click on „Stop“…
  • Page 41: General Description

    ENERAL ESCRIPTION Configure IP address The IP address either can be configured via ProDrive permanently or defined via the field- bus by DHCP or BOOTP. Static IP addresses can be assigned via the ProDrive only. Via the fieldbus statical IP addresses as well as DHCP or BOOTP addresses can be as- signed.

  • Page 42: Accept The Ip Address Of Prodrive

    Configure IP address 7.1.1 Accept the IP address of ProDrive As long as from the IP address settings in ProDrive no host IP address of 0 results the IP settings in ProDrive for Modbus/TCP are accepted 1:1 Example 1: Network IP 192.168.1, host IP 21 via manually input Via the following settings the device can be configured to the IP address 192.168.1.21 Figure 19: Manual input…

  • Page 43: Setting Via The Dip Switch

    General Description Example 2: Network IP 17 via dip switch Via the following settings the device can be configured to the IP address 192.168.0.17 Figure 20: Setting via the dip switch Instruction handbook b maXX 5000 add-on module MOD Document No.: 5.19015.01 of 90…

  • Page 44: Accept Ip Setting Of Fieldbus

    Configure IP address 7.1.2 Accept IP setting of fieldbus So that the fieldbus can control the IP settings via the ProDrive settings the host IP must be 0. Then the IP settings can be made via DHCP or BOOTP. Example 3: Host IP = 0 via the dip switch All dip switches are on 0: Figure 21: Settings of the fieldbus…

  • Page 45: Modbus Function Codes

    General Description Modbus function codes The Modbus/TCP add on module supports word access (16 bits) to Modbus register, on- The following function codes are supported: Function code Meaning Read multiple register (WORD access) Read input register (WORD access) Write single register (WORD access) FC16 Write multiple register (WORD access) FC23…

  • Page 46: Process Data Mapping

    Process data (cyclic communication) 7.3.1 Process data mapping The process data mapping of the b maXX 5000 can be configured by the Modbus register 210 — 337 (actual process data mapping) and register 410 — 537 (set process data map- ping).

  • Page 47
    General Description Mapping b maXX 5000 Single axis: Modbus Name Access Meaning register Actual PDO Mapping 0 Read- FB of the parameter, which is mapped on the first digit of the Write actual values. (Modbus address 2-3) Actual PDO Mapping 0 Read- PNR of the parameter, which is mapped on the first digit of the Write…
  • Page 48
    Process data (cyclic communication) Modbus Name Access Meaning register Set PDO Mapping 1 Read- Axis of the parameter, which is mapped on the second digit of axis Write the set values. (Modbus address 104-105) … Set PDO Mapping 15 Read- FB of the parameter, which is mapped on the last digit of the Write set values.
  • Page 49
    General Description Modbus Name Access Meaning register Set PDO Mapping 0 Read- FB of the parameter, which is mapped on the first digit of the Write set values. (Modbus address 102-103) Set PDO Mapping 0 Read- PNR of the parameter, which is mapped on the first digit of the Write set values.
  • Page 50: Cycle Time Of The Process Data

    Process data (cyclic communication) Example Two parameter should be mapped on the actual process data and a parameter should be mapped on the set process data. Actual process data (Actual PDO): PDO 0: FB = 126; PNR = 61; FBI = 0; first axis PDO 1: FB = 126;…

  • Page 51: Process Data Exchange

    General Description 7.3.3 Process data exchange The b maXX process data can be read by Modbus register 2 to 65 (actual process data) and can be wirtten by Modus register 102 to 165 (set process data). The parameters are selected depending on the process data mapping (see ZProcess data mapping–…

  • Page 52
    Process data (cyclic communication) Process data b maXX 5000 Double axis: Range Modbus Name Access Meaning register Actual 2 – 3 Actual Read-only First 32 bit Actual process data object. Depending on process data PDO 0 configured mapping. 4 – 5 Actual Read-only Second 32 bit Actual process data object.
  • Page 53: Status Word And Control Word

    General Description Status word and Control word 7.4.1 Status word The system state and the error state can be requested in the status word. The status word and the actual process data can be transmitted withing the same Modbus function code because the status word is in Modbus register 0 directly previous to the actual process data.

  • Page 54: Control Word

    Status word and Control word 7.4.2 Control word The system state can be changed and the error states acknowledged via the control word. The control word and the set process data can be transmitted withing the same Modbus function code because the control word is in Modbus register 100 directly previ- ous to the set process data.

  • Page 55: Service Data (Acyclic Communication)

    General Description Service data (acyclic communication) Independent to the process data the Modbus/TCP has access to all b maXX parameters. The Modbus register 600 — 652 is used: Modbus Name Access Meaning register F: Format Read- Permissible values: 0, 1 Write DS: Data set Read-…

  • Page 56: Example Service Data Communication

    Service data (acyclic communication) The data of register 611 to max. 650 (depending on the length setting in register 610) is written to the selected parameter in case of an writing access to register 611. The b maXX firstly writes all values to the Modbus register and after that copies the values to the selected parameters in case of writing access to register 611 — 6xx with the function code «Write multiple register».

  • Page 57: States Of Communication

    General Description States of communication 7.6.1 Pre-Operational In state Pre-Operational the device can be configured and an access to the controller pa- rameters via register range 600 — 652 is possible. No parameters are mapped to the process data register. 7.6.2 Operational With the transition Pre-Operational to Operational the cyclic communication is parame-…

  • Page 58: Actual Value Watchdog

    Controller timeout 7.7.1 Actual Value Watchdog m The actual value watchdog is configured by Modbus register 203 m A value of 0 deactivates the watchdog m A value not equal 0 corresponds with the watchdog time in ms m The watchdog can be configured in state Pre-Operational only m The watchdog timer is restarted with the configured value in ms with every reading of the status word in state Operational.

  • Page 59: Project Example Schneider Electric Unity Pros

    ROJECT EXAMPLE CHNEIDER LECTRIC NITY P34 2020 ODICON The b maXX 5000 was configured to the IP address 192.168.1.20 to demonstrate the fol- lowing examples. Instruction handbook b maXX 5000 add-on module MOD Document No.: 5.19015.01 of 90…

  • Page 60: Create Projects Using The Corresponding Modbus Client

    Create projects using the corresponding Modbus client Create projects using the corresponding Modbus client Instruction handbook b maXX 5000 add-on module MOD Document No.: 5.19015.01 Baumüller Nürnberg GmbH of 90…

  • Page 61: Add Modbus Tcp Network

    Project example SCHNEIDER ELECTRIC UNITY PRO S Add Modbus TCP Network Instruction handbook b maXX 5000 add-on module MOD Document No.: 5.19015.01 of 90…

  • Page 62
    Add Modbus TCP Network The model series and the IP address configuration of the Modbus TCP Client must be set in network settings. The address of the Modbus TCP Client is set via a DHCP Server in this example.The IP address of the Modbus TCP Client is set to 192.168.1.10 by the DHCP Server.
  • Page 63
    Project example SCHNEIDER ELECTRIC UNITY PRO S The provided network connection of the Ethernet interface must be assigned in the Ether- net configuration of the Modbus TCP Client. Instruction handbook b maXX 5000 add-on module MOD Document No.: 5.19015.01 of 90…
  • Page 64
    Add Modbus TCP Network Instruction handbook b maXX 5000 add-on module MOD Document No.: 5.19015.01 Baumüller Nürnberg GmbH of 90…
  • Page 65: Create Program

    Project example SCHNEIDER ELECTRIC UNITY PRO S Create program The variables used in the program must be defined. Instruction handbook b maXX 5000 add-on module MOD Document No.: 5.19015.01 of 90…

  • Page 66
    Create program The use of dynamic arrays must be activated within the project settings. Instruction handbook b maXX 5000 add-on module MOD Document No.: 5.19015.01 Baumüller Nürnberg GmbH of 90…
  • Page 67
    Project example SCHNEIDER ELECTRIC UNITY PRO S Instruction handbook b maXX 5000 add-on module MOD Document No.: 5.19015.01 of 90…
  • Page 68
    Create program A new program can be generated now. In this example a program with structured text (ST) is generated. A cyclic communication with 4 ms is configured on Modbus TCP Server with address 192.168.1.20. The parameters 126.1 of axis 1 and axis 2 are mapped cyclically as actual and set pro- cess data Furthermore the parameter 126.63 of axis 1 and the parameter 126.64 of axis 2 are writ- ten and read acyclically.
  • Page 69
    Project example SCHNEIDER ELECTRIC UNITY PRO S Instruction handbook b maXX 5000 add-on module MOD Document No.: 5.19015.01 of 90…
  • Page 70
    Create program Instruction handbook b maXX 5000 add-on module MOD Document No.: 5.19015.01 Baumüller Nürnberg GmbH of 90…
  • Page 71
    Project example SCHNEIDER ELECTRIC UNITY PRO S (*—-Init variables—-start*) state = 0 then addressParam := ADDM(‘Ethernet_1{192.168.1.20}’); accessParams[0] := 0; accessParams[1] := 0; accessParams[2] := 2; (*Modbus access timeout in 100ms -> 200ms*) accessParams[3] := 0; (*Set timings*) fieldbusCycleTime := 4000; (*4000µs*) inputWatchdogTime := 80;…
  • Page 72
    Create program acyclicData[12] := 0; axis := 1; state := state + 1; (*—-Init variables—-end*) (*—-Set b maXX to PreOp—-start*) elsif state = 1 then (*Set control word to 16#3E -> go to PreOp and reset all errors*) outputData[0] := 16#3E; WRITE_VAR(addressParam, ‘%MW’, 100, 1, outputData, accessParams);…
  • Page 73
    Project example SCHNEIDER ELECTRIC UNITY PRO S WRITE_VAR (addressParam, ‘%MW’, 410, 12, outMapping, accessParams); (*Maximal 120 WORD*) state := state + 1; elsif state = 6 then (*WRITE_VAR was finished?*) accessParams[0].0 = false then (*Was any error while WRITE_VAR?*) accessParams[1] <> 0 then (*Error happened ->…
  • Page 74
    Create program := ‘%MW’, := 100, := 62, EMIS := outputData, GEST := accessParams); state := state + 1; elsif state = 10 then (*WRITE_VAR was finished?*) accessParams[0].0 = false then (*Was any error while WRITE_VAR?*) accessParams[1] <> 0 then (*Error happened ->…
  • Page 75
    Project example SCHNEIDER ELECTRIC UNITY PRO S inputData[0].2 = true then (*Output data watchdog expired -> reset the error by setting the same bit in control word*) outputData[0].2 := true; else outputData[0].2 := false; end_if; inputData[0].3 = true then (*Input data timeout in b maXX ->…
  • Page 76
    Create program (*Was any error while WRITE_VAR?*) accessParams[1] <> 0 then (*Error happened -> go to error state*) state := 100; else state := state + 1; end_if; end_if; (*—-Do acyclic communication write—-end*) (*—-Do acyclic communication read—-start*) elsif state = 16 then axis = 1 then…
  • Page 77: Create User Window

    Project example SCHNEIDER ELECTRIC UNITY PRO S Create User Window Cyclic and acyclic parameters can be displayed in a user window Instruction handbook b maXX 5000 add-on module MOD Document No.: 5.19015.01 of 90…

  • Page 78
    Create User Window Instruction handbook b maXX 5000 add-on module MOD Document No.: 5.19015.01 Baumüller Nürnberg GmbH of 90…
  • Page 79: Transfer Project To Plc

    Project example SCHNEIDER ELECTRIC UNITY PRO S Transfer project to PLC The project can be transmitted to the PLC and the programm can be started then. Instruction handbook b maXX 5000 add-on module MOD Document No.: 5.19015.01 of 90…

  • Page 80
    Transfer project to PLC The project can be started with the commands SPS  Connect SPS  Transmit project to PLC SPS  Start The counters of the corresponding input arrays of the user window are incremented. Instruction handbook b maXX 5000 add-on module MOD Document No.: 5.19015.01 Baumüller Nürnberg GmbH of 90…
  • Page 81: Troubleshooting And Fault Correction

    ROUBLESHOOTING AND FAULT CORRECTION Behavior in case of malfunctions Basic information DANGER! Risk of fatal injury from electrical current! Inevitably, when operating this electrical device, certain parts of it are energized with hazardous voltage. Therefore: m Pay heed to areas on the device that could be dangerous. WARNING! Risk of injury due to improper fault correction! Therefore:…

  • Page 82: Error Detection

    Error detection Error detection The fault can be caused by mechanical or electrical malfunctions. The occurrence of an error state is signalized by the lighting up of the red LED H14 or H24 on the front side of the housing. NOTE! In case of warnings or errors without error reactions, the LEDs H14 or H24 blink „Malfunction“.

  • Page 83: Error Handling

    Troubleshooting and fault correction Error handling NOTE! The device is provided with predefined error reactions. You are able to set the error reaction of the device in „Depending on settings“ in the column „Reaction“ marked er- ror messages. An exception here are errors, which have to have an immediate pulse inhibit as a consequence.

  • Page 84: Error Messages

    Error handling 9.3.2 Error messages In the column „Reaction“ the reaction of the system to the error is shown: m „adjustable“ = the error reaction can be set via ProDrive (Window „Drive management“, toolbar button „Error reaction“). Error Error description Reaction Troubleshooting Configuration error,…

  • Page 85: Table Of Figures

    Table of Figures Table of Figures Pulse cycles, incremental encoder emulation IEE …………..Front view add-on module EIP………………..Part number — front ……………………Location of the type plate ………………….Connection diagram incremental encoder emulation IEE …………Connection cable IEE with b maXX 5000 ……………… .ProDrive Navigation ……………………

  • Page 86
    Table of Figures Instruction handbook b maXX 5000 add-on module MOD Document No.: 5.19015.01 Baumüller Nürnberg GmbH of 90…
  • Page 87: Index

    Index Accidents Note Active mains rectifier unit Notice Axis unit Axis unit safety Operating personnel Operation Caution Output signals Commissioning procedure Connection diagram Parameter list Customer service Part number Personnel, qualified Danger Personnel, training Danger areas Pin assignment DC link discharge time ProDrive, Start Disposal Quit errors…

  • Page 88
    Index Instruction handbook b maXX 5000 add-on module MOD Document No.: 5.19015.01 Baumüller Nürnberg GmbH of 90…
  • Page 89: Survey Of Revisions

    Survey of Revisions Survey of Revisions Version Edition Changes 5.19015.01 14-Jan-2020 First issue Instruction handbook b maXX 5000 add-on module MOD Document No.: 5.19015.01 of 90…

  • Page 90
    Notes Instruction handbook b maXX 5000 add-on module MOD Document No.: 5.19015.01 Baumüller Nürnberg GmbH of 90…
  • Page 92
    Baumüller Nürnberg GmbH Ostendstraße 80-90 90482 Nürnberg T: +49(0)911-5432-0 F: +49(0)911-5432-130 www.baumueller.com All information given in this manual is customer information, subject to change without notice. We reserve the right to futher develop and actualize our products continuously using our permanent revision service. Please notice, that specifications/data/information are current values according to the printing date. These statements are not legally binding according to the measurement, computation and calculations.

Современные частотные преобразователи совмещают функции управления и защиты электродвигателя. При ненормальных режимах работы, авариях, преобразователь:

  • Экстренно отключает электродвигатель (торможение осуществляется выбегом).
  • Плавно тормозит привод.
  • Запрещает запуск двигателя.

При этом сообщение с кодом неисправности выводится на дисплей устройства и фиксируется в запоминающем устройстве. При наличии комплексной системы автоматизации и телемеханики, аварийный сигнал подается на удаленный пункт управления и центральный процессор.

Причинами остановки электродвигателя могут быть:

  • Поломки преобразователя частоты.
  • Неисправности электропривода или оборудования.
  • Аварии в сети.

Большинство частотных преобразователей имеют функцию самодиагностики, которая позволяет определить причину аварийной остановки. Ошибки разделяются на внутренние и внешние. Последние связаны с неисправностями двигателя, авариями сети. Внутренние ошибки говорят о неисправностях преобразователя или неправильных настройках.

Ошибки частотных преобразователей

Типовые неисправности

Перегрев

При повышении температуры частотного преобразователя выше допустимого значения, на дисплей устройства выводится сообщение OH (Over Heat) или цифровой код ошибки. Перегрев может быть связан с ошибками монтажа, неисправностями встроенного или внешнего вентилятора, неправильным выбором мощности.

При появлении такого сообщения необходимо выяснить причины, даже если перегрев не привел к остановке привода. Конденсатор в звене постоянного тока, силовые транзисторы чувствительны к повышению температуры. Перегрев приводит к пробою элементов преобразователя.

Прежде необходимо проверить правильность выбора по мощности. Если ток нагрузки превышает допустимые значение выходного тока преобразователя, частотник необходимо заменить на более мощный.

Также нужно проверить состояние внутренних вентиляторов охлаждения. При необходимости сделать их чистку или замену. При размещении преобразователя в шкафу управления, нужно обеспечить достаточное охлаждение преобразователя. Проблема решается установкой дополнительного вентилятора или переносом частотного преобразователя в место с достаточной циркуляцией воздуха.

Низкое напряжение

При снижении напряжения на входе преобразователя или в звене постоянного тока, на дисплее появляется сообщение LV (Low Voltage). Причинами могут быть:

  • Пуск мощного оборудования, подключенного к одной линии с частотно-регулируемым приводом.
  • Обрыв фазы на входе.
  • Неправильное подключение.
  • Поломки устройств, включенных в цепь перед частотным преобразователем.

При провале напряжения, вызванного включением мощного электрооборудования, требуется подключить привод, регулируемый преобразователем, к другой линии. Также нужно проверить правильность подключения, напряжение на всех фазах, при необходимости устранить обрыв. При ослаблении контактов силовой цепи, необходимо зачистить контактные группы и подтянуть винтовые клеммы. Для выявления неисправностей дополнительных устройств необходимо измерить напряжение до и после них. При наличии отклонений отремонтировать или заменить оборудование.

Превышение напряжения

Рост напряжения в звене постоянного тока обычно возникает при резком торможении электродвигателя. При этом на дисплей выводится цифровой код ошибки или сообщение OV (Over Voltage). Проблема решается увеличением времени торможения или подключением тормозного резистора. Такая ошибка может быть вызвана неисправностью узла измерения напряжения. В этом случае требуется диагностика и ремонт преобразователя.

Перегрузка

При превышении тока на выходе преобразователя, на дисплее высвечивается сообщение OC (Over Current) или OL (Over Load). Это может быть вызвано:

  • Замыканием в обмотках двигателя или в выходной цепи.
  • Превышением допустимой нагрузки на валу.
  • Перегрузкой при торможении или разгоне.

При этом необходима диагностика электродвигателя, изменение режима работы оборудования.

Важно!Коды ошибок дают приблизительную оценку неисправностей. При авариной остановке или запрете пуска требуется детальная диагностика.

Ошибки частотных преобразователей 2

Прежде всего необходимо проверить условия эксплуатации, исправность двигателя, датчиков и другого внешнего оборудования, проанализировать режимы работы электропривода.

Большинство проблем с частотно-регулируемым приводом можно решить устранением поломок внешних устройств, изменением настроек или обеспечением требуемых условий функционирования устройств.

При появлении сообщений о внутренних неисправностях нужен демонтаж, тестирование и ремонт преобразователя частоты.

Диагностика преобразователя частоты

Для диагностики и ремонта преобразователей частоты необходимо специальное оборудование:

  • Электродвигатель с требуемыми параметрами. Для тестирования преобразователя в фактических условиях эксплуатации необходим двигатель с нужными характеристиками.
  • Преобразователь напряжения 220, 380, 660 В, 50-60 Гц. Устройство нужно для электропитания преобразователя.
  • Многофункциональный электроизмерительный прибор. Устройство необходимо для определения параметров полупроводниковых элементов, прозвонки внутренних цепей преобразователя.
  • Источник дискретных и аналоговых сигналов. Оборудование нужно для тестирования блока управления и контроллера. Устройство имитирует сигналы с датчиков технологических параметров. В ходе диагностики таким оборудованием проверяют реакцию привода на управляющие сигналы.
  • Осциллограф. Прибор служит для тестирования параметров ШИМ-модулятора.

Диагностику выполняют в следующем порядке. В начале анализируют сообщения об ошибках в журнале событий. Это дает представление о возможных неисправностях.

Далее проверяют контактные соединения. Неплотный контакт проводников, неправильное подключение – наиболее вероятные причины запрета пуска или появления ошибок.

Затем тестируют программное обеспечение и корректность настроек. Производители поставляют пакет диагностических программ, позволяющих выявить ошибки ПО. Для этого их устанавливают на ПК, подключают к компьютеру преобразователь частоты.

При корректно работающих программах, отсутствии ошибок при подключении, преобразователь разбирают, прозванивают цепи, выполняют диагностику элементной базы силового и управляющего блока. Все выявленные неисправности устраняют. При необходимости чистят или заменяют внутренние вентиляторы охлаждения. Далее собирают устройство, тестируют его на холостом ходу без нагрузки. Затем подключают преобразователь к двигателю и генератору аналоговых и дискретных сигналов, проверяют ПЧ во всех режимах работы.

Для проведения диагностики и ремонта ПЧ требуется соответствующая квалификация, специализированное оборудование и программное обеспечение.

Если проблема не вызвана неправильным подключением, неполадками внешних устройств и двигателя, ошибками при монтаже, следует обратиться в сервисный центр производителя.

Instruction handbook
Read the Instruction handbook before starting any work!
Language English
Translation
Document No. 5.11018.11
Part No. 441839
Status 05.03.2018
E
5.11018.11

b maXX 3000

BM3000
Mains rectifier
BM3200 / BM3300
Compact servo unit




Copyright This Instruction handbook may be copied by the owner in any quantity, but only for internal 
use. This Instruction handbook may not be copied or reproduced, in whole or in part, for any 
other purposes.
The use and disclosure of information contained in this Instruction handbook are not permit-
ted.
Designations and company marks contained in this Instruction handbook could be trade-
marks, the use of which by third parties for their own purposes could violate the rights of the 
rights holder.
Preliminary information
Warning Insofar as this document is identified as being preliminary information, the following 
applies:

this version is regarded as providing advance technical information to users of the described 
devices and their functions at an early enough time in order to adapt to any possible changes 
or expanded functionality. 

This information must be regarded as being preliminary, as it has not yet passed through 
Baumüller's internal review process. In particular, this information is still subject to changes, 
thus no legal liability can be derived from this preliminary information. Baumüller assumes no 
liability for damages that might arise from this possibly faulty or incomplete version. 

If you detect or suspect any content errors and/or major form errors in this preliminary infor-
mation, we request that you notify the Baumüller support specialist responsible for you. 
Please provide us, via this employee, with your insights and comments so that we can take 
them into account and include them when transitioning from the preliminary information to 
the final information (as reviewed by Baumüller). 

The conditions stipulated in the following section under "Obligatory" are invalid in case of pre-
liminary information.
Obligatory This Instruction handbook are a part of the equipment/machine. This Instruction handbook 
must be available to the operator at all times and must be in legible condition. If the equip
-
ment/machine is sold or moved another location, this Instruction handbook must be passed 
on by the owner together with the equipment/machine.
After any sale of the equipment/machine, this original and all copies must be handed over to 
the buyer. After disposal or any other end use, this original and all copies must be destroyed.
When the present Instruction handbook is handed over, corresponding sets of Instruction 
handbooks of a previous version are automatically invalidated. 
Please note that the specifications/data/information are current values according to the 
printing date. These statements are not legally binding with regard to measurements, 
computation or calculations.

Baumüller Nürnberg GmbH reserves the right, in developing its products further, to change 
the technical specifications and handling of it products concerned without prior notice.
No liability can be accepted concerning the correctness of this Instruction handbook unless 
otherwise specified in the General Conditions of Sale and Delivery.
 Baumüller Nürnberg GmbH
Ostendstr. 80 - 90
90482 Nuremberg
Germany
Tel.  +49 9 11 54 32 - 0   
Fax:  +49 9 11 54 32 - 1 30
Email : [email protected]
Internet: www.baumueller.de




Instruction handbook b maXX  BM3000, BM3200, BM3300
Document no. 5.11018.11 
3
of 218
Table of contents
1   General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .    7
1.1   Information on this Instruction handbook. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .    7
1.2   Key to symbols  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .    7
1.3   Limitation of liability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .    8
1.4   Copyright protection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .    9
1.5   Applicable documents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .    9
1.6   Spare parts  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .    10
1.7   Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .    10
1.8   Guarantee provisions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .    10
1.9   Customer service. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .    10
1.10   Terms used . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .    10
2   Safety  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .    11
2.1   Contents of the Instruction handbook  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .    11
2.2   Changes and modifications to the device  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .    11
2.3   Appropriate use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .    12
2.4   Responsibility of the operating company . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .    13
2.5   Protective devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .    13
2.6   Training of the personnel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .    14
2.7   Personal protective equipment  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .    15
2.8   Special hazards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .    16
2.9   Fire fighting  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .    17
2.10   Safety equipment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .    18
2.11   Behavior in hazardous situations or at accidents  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .    18
2.12   Signs and labels  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .    19
3   Technical Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .    23
3.1   Dimensions  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .    23
3.1.1   Dimensions BM3000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .    24
3.1.2   Dimensions BM3200, BM3300 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .    25
3.2   Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .    25
3.3   Operating conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .    26
3.3.1   System types. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .    26
3.3.2   Requirements to the energy supply: power supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .    27
3.3.3   Requirements to the control voltage / 24 V-supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .    28
3.3.4   Requirements to the motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .    28
3.3.5   Required environmental conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .    29
3.3.6   Correction factors at modified operational conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .    30
3.3.6.1  Installation altitude. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .    30
3.3.6.2  Environmental temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .    31
3.3.6.3  Supply voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .    31
3.3.6.4  DC-link voltage  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .    33
3.3.7   Cooling  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .    34
3.4   Electrical data  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .    35
3.4.1   Electrical data BM3002 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .    35
3.4.2   Electrical data BM3X01-XT/BM3X11-XT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .    36
3.4.3   Electrical data BM3X02-XT, BM3X03-XT, BM3X04-XT, 400 V. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .    38
3.4.4   Electrical data BM3X12-XT, BM3X13-XT, 400 V  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .    40
3.4.5   Electrical data BM3XXX-XE, 230 V. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .    42
3.4.6  Frequency-output-dependent current derating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .    44
3.4.7   Load cycle according to EN61800-6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .    45






















































Instruction handbook b maXX BM3000, BM3200, BM3300
Document no. 5.11018.11 Baumüller Nürnberg GmbH
4
of 218
Table of contents
4   Design and Function  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .   47
4.1   Design  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .   48
4.2   Identification of the device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .   50
4.2.1   Part number BM3200, BM3300 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .   50
4.2.2   Type plate  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .   51
4.2.3   Type code  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .   53
4.3   UL notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .   55
4.4   Display elements BM3000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .   57
4.5   Display- and operating elements BM3200, BM3300  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .   58
4.5.1   Function of the 7-segment display. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .   62
4.5.2   Function of the LEDs H11 to H14  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .   63
4.5.3   Function of the LEDs H31/H32 and H41/H42 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .   64
4.5.4   Settings address switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .   66
5   Transport and Packaging  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .   71
5.1   Safety notes for transport . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .   71
5.2   What to observe when transporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .   71
5.3   Transport inspection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .   72
5.4   Unpacking  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .   72
5.5   Disposal of the packaging  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .   72
6   Mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .   73
6.1   Safety notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .   73
6.2   Preparing for mounting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .   76
6.3   Drilling templates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .   77
6.4   Mounting instruction BM3000. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .   80
6.5   Mounting instruction BM3200, BM3300 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .   83
7   Installation  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .   85
7.1   Safety notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .   85
7.2   Voltage test  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .   87
7.3   Demands on the electrical power supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .   88
7.4   Requirements for the connection cables  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .   88
7.5   Protection of the device and accordingly of the cable  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .   88
7.6   PE connection and RCD compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .   89
7.7   Installation requirements with regard to EMC stability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .   89
7.8   Shielding plan. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .   90
7.8.1   Shielding connection mounting plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .   91
7.8.2   Shielding connection with shield sheet  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .   91
7.8.2.1  Mounting shield sheet  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .   91
7.8.2.2  Connecting the shield. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .   92
7.9   Requirements for the motor temperature sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .   95
7.10   Installation procedure BM3000. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .   96
7.11   Installation procedure BM3200, BM3300 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .   97
7.12   Connecting diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .   98
7.12.1   Mains rectifier BM3000  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .   99
7.12.2   BM3XXX-XT as a compact servo unit (3-phase) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .   100
7.12.3   BM3XXX as an axis unit  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .   103
7.12.4   BM3XXX-XT as a compact servo unit (single-phase) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .   108
7.12.5   BM3XXX-XE as compact servo unit (1-phase, 230 V). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .   111
7.12.6   Application: Power supply connection (3-phase) with energy compensation  . . . . .   114
7.12.7   Application: DC link connection of further BM3000 or of additional capacities . . . .   116






















































Instruction handbook b maXX BM3000, BM3200, BM3300
Document no. 5.11018.11
5
of 218
Table of contents
7.13   Connections BM3000  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .    119
7.13.1   X100 input bridging relay. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .    119
7.13.2  Power connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .    119
7.14   Connections. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .    120
7.14.1   BM3200, BM3300 front side . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .    120
7.14.1.1  X1 - Service interface  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .    120
7.14.1.2  X2 - Digital inputs/outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .    121
7.14.1.3  X3 / X4 - fieldbus connection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .    122
7.14.1.4  X6 - analog inputs/outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .    126
7.14.1.5  X7 - encoder connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .    127
7.14.2   Connections BM3200, BM3300 on top . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .    133
7.14.2.1  X200 - 24V voltage supply. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .    137
7.14.2.2  X202, X203, X205 - power supply, DC link, ballast resistor connection . . . . . . . .    138
7.14.2.3  X300 - signal bus. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .    140
7.14.3   Connections BM3200, BM3300 at the bottom. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .    142
7.14.3.1  X101 - motor temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .    143
7.14.3.2  X102 - safe torque off - option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .    143
7.14.3.3  X107 - motor connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .    144
7.14.4   PE connections BM3200, BM3300 rear panel  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .    145
8   Operation  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .    147
8.1   Safety notes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .    147
8.2   Bridging charge resistance BM3000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .    148
8.3   Operating concept BM3200, BM3300 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .    149
8.3.1   Enable signals. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .    149
8.3.2   Monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .    149
8.3.3   Service interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .    150
8.4   DC-link load / switch-on frequency of power supply  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .    150
8.5   Optional safety function STO of BM3300  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .    151
8.5.1   Safety notes according STO function (Safe Torque Off). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .    151
8.5.2   Safety levels and safety notes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .    152
8.5.3   Function. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .    153
8.5.4   Timing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .    154
8.5.5   Supply with separate power supplies  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .    154
8.5.6   Examples for input wiring  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .    155
8.6   Fieldbus communication  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .    158
8.6.1  EtherCAT
®
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .    158
8.6.2   VARAN.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .    160
8.6.3  CANopen
®
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .    162
8.6.4  POWERLINK
®
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .    164
9   Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .    165
9.1   Safety notes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .    165
9.2   Environmental conditions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .    165
9.3   Inspection intervals - maintenance notes  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .    166
9.3.1   Periodic maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .    167
9.4   Repairs  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .    170
10  Troubleshooting and Fault Correction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .    171
10.1   Behavior in case of malfunctions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .    171
10.2   Monitoring functions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .    172
10.2.1   Monitoring functions  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .    173
10.3   Error detection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .    175
10.4   Troubleshooting/error acknowledge  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .    175
























































Instruction handbook b maXX BM3000, BM3200, BM3300
Document no. 5.11018.11 Baumüller Nürnberg GmbH
6
of 218
Table of contents
11  Accessories and Spare Parts  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .   177
11.1   Cables  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .   177
11.1.1   Cable power supply-device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .   177
11.1.2   Cable device-motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .   178
11.1.3   Hybrid cable device-encoder-motor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .   178
11.1.4   Cable DC-link. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .   180
11.1.5   Cable control power supply / signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .   180
11.1.6   Cable signal bus  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .   181
11.1.7   Cables - EtherCAT
®
, VARAN, POWERLINK
®
 .  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .   181
11.1.8   Accessories - CANopen
®
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .   182
11.1.9   Cable service interface  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .   182
11.1.10   Encoder cables  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .   183
11.1.10.1  Connecting cable for Resolver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .   185
11.1.10.2  Connecting cable for encoder with HIPERFACE
®
 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .   186
11.1.10.3  Connecting cable for encoder with EnDat
®
 or SSI. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .   187
11.1.10.4  Connecting cable for encoder with EnDat
®
 2.2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .   188
11.1.10.5  Connecting cable for sine/square-wave incremental encoder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .   190
11.2   Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .   191
11.2.1   Cable protection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .   191
11.2.2   Device protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .   191
11.2.3   Cable protection and device protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .   192
11.3   Mains filter  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .   193
11.3.1   Required environmental conditions mains filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .   193
11.3.2   Mains filter for 3-phase devices BM3XXX-XTXX. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .   193
11.3.3   Mains filter for 1-phase devices BM3XXX-XEXX. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .   195
11.4   Spare parts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .   196
11.4.1   Connectors BM3200, BM3300. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .   196
11.4.2   Accessories kit shielding BM3200, BM3300  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .   197
11.4.3   Accessories kit protection cover BM3000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .   197
12  Shutdown, Storage. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .   199
12.1   Safety instructions  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .   199
12.2   Requirements to the executing personnel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .   200
12.3   Shutdown . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .   200
12.4   Demounting  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .   200
12.5   Storage conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .   201
12.6   Recommissioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .   202
13  Disposal. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .   203
13.1   Safety regulations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .   203
13.2  Disposal facilities/authorities  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .   205
Appendix A - Abbreviations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
Appendix B - Declaration of Conformity  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
Table of figures. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .   213
Index  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .   215
Overview of Revisions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .   217

















































7
of 218
 Instruction handbook b maXX BM3000, BM3200, BM3300
Document no. 5.11018.11 
1GENERAL
1.1 Information on this Instruction handbook
This Instruction handbook provides important information on handling the device. A pre-
requisite for safe work is compliance with all specified safety notes and procedural in-
structions.
Additionally, the valid accident prevention regulations and general safety regulations ap-
plicable to the scope of application the device must be complied with.
Read this Instruction handbook, particularly the safety notes chapter, completely before 
beginning any work on the device. This Instruction handbook is part of the product and 
must be kept accessible to personnel at all times in the immediate vicinity of the device. 
1.2 Key to symbols
Warning notes
Warning notes are identified by symbols in this Instruction handbook. The notes are in-
troduced by signal words that express the extent of the danger.
It is imperative that these notes be complied with and are conscientiously regarded in or-
der to prevent accidents, personal injury and material damage.
DANGER!
....points out a directly dangerous situation, that will lead to severe injuries or death, 
if not avoided.
WARNING!
....points out a potentially dangerous situation, that could lead to severe injuries or 
death, if not avoided.





Limitation of liability
Instruction handbook b maXX BM3000, BM3200, BM3300
Document no. 5.11018.11 Baumüller Nürnberg GmbH
8
of 218
1.3
Recommen-
dations
1.3 Limitation of liability
All specifications and notes in this Instruction handbook were compiled taking into ac-
count the applicable standards and regulations, the state of the art and our knowledge 
and experience of many years.
The manufacturer assumes no liability for damages due to:
m noncompliance with the Instruction handbook
m usage for other than the intended purpose
m usage by untrained personnel
The actual scope of delivery can vary in case of optional equipment, laying claim to addi-
tional order options, or on account of the latest technical changes to the explanations and 
representations described herein.
The user bears the responsibility for performing service and commissioning in accor-
dance with the safety regulations of the applicable standards and all other relevant gov-
ernmental or local regulations referring to the dimensioning and protection of conductors, 
grounding, disconnectors, overcurrent protection, etc.
The person who carried out the mounting or installation is liable for any damage, which 
incurred when assembling or connecting the device.
CAUTION!
....points out a potentially dangerous situation, that can lead to minor or slight injuries, 
if not avoided.
NOTICE!
....points out a potentially dangerous situation, that can lead to material damage, if 
not avoided.
NOTE!
....highlights useful hints and recommendations, as well as information for the effi-
cient and trouble-free use.





General
Instruction handbook b maXX BM3000, BM3200, BM3300
Document no. 5.11018.11 
9
of 218
1
1.4 Copyright protection
CANopen
®
is a registered trademark of CAN in Automation e. V.
EnDat
®
is a registered trademark of Dr. Johannes Heidenhain GmbH,
83301 Traunreut, Germany
EtherCAT
®
is a registered trademark of Beckhoff Automation GmbH, 
33415 Verl, Germany
HIPERFACE
®
HIPERFACE DSL
®
is a registered trademark of SICK STEGMANN GmbH, 
78166 Donaueschingen, Germany
PROFINET

  is a registered trademark of PROFIBUS International
speedtec
®
is a registered trademark of INTERCONTEC Produkt GmbH 
94559 Niederwinkling, Germany
The Instruction handbook must be treated confidentially
. It is to be used exclusively by 
personnel who work with the device. The consignment of the Instruction handbook to third 
persons without the written permission of the manufacturer is prohibited.
1.5 Applicable documents
Components of other manufacturers are integrated into the device. For these purchased 
parts, hazard assessments have been performed by the respective manufacturers. The 
compliance of the design construction with the applicable European and national regula-
tions has been declared for the components by the respective manufacturers.
NOTE!
T
he specific contents, text, drawings, images and other representations are copy-
righted and subject to industrial property rights. Any prohibited usage is punishable 
by law.
NOTE!
Please note, that BAUMÜLLER is not responsible to examine whether any (industrial 
property) rights of third parties are infringed by the application-specific use of the 
BAUMÜLLER products/components or the execution.





Spare parts
Instruction handbook b maXX BM3000, BM3200, BM3300
Document no. 5.11018.11 Baumüller Nürnberg GmbH
10
of 218
1.6
1.6 Spare parts
Procure spare parts through an authorized dealer or directly from the manufacturer. 
See also ZAccessories and Spare Parts– as from page 177.
1.7 Disposal
Insofar as no take-back or disposal agreement has been made, please disassemble units 
correctly and properly recycle the constituent parts.
See also ZDisposal– on page 203.
1.8 Guarantee provisions
The guarantee provisions are stated in a separate document of the sales documents.
The devices described herein may only be operated in accordance with the stipulated 
methods, procedures and conditions. Anything else not presented here, including the op-
eration of devices in mounted positions, is not permitted and must be cleared with the 
plant on a case-by-case basis. If the devices are operated in any other manner than as 
described within this Instruction handbook, then all guarantee and warranty rights are ren-
dered null and void.
1.9 Customer service
Our customer service is available to provide you with technical information.
Info on the responsible contact persons is available at all times via telephone, fax, mail or 
the Internet.
1.10 Terms used
The term „device“ or the item designation BM3XXX are also used in this documentation 
for this Baumüller product „BM3000, BM3200, BM3300“. A list of the abbreviations used 
can be found in ZAppendix A - Abbreviations– from page 207.
WARNING!
False or flawed spare parts can lead to damage, malfunction or complete fail-
ure, thus endangering safety.
Therefore:
m Only use original spare parts of the manufacturer.








11
of 218
 Instruction handbook b maXX BM3000, BM3200, BM3300
Document no. 5.11018.11 
2SAFETY
This section provides an overview of all of the important safety aspects for optimum pro-
tection of personnel as well as for the safe and problem-free operation.
2.1 Contents of the Instruction handbook
Each person who is tasked with performing work on or with the device must have read 
and understood the Instruction handbook before working with the device. This also ap-
plies if the person involved with this kind of device or a similar one, or has been trained 
by the manufacturer.
2.2 Changes and modifications to the device
In order to prevent hazards and to ensure optimum performance, no changes, additions 
or modifications may be undertaken on the device that have not been explicitly approved 
by the manufacturer.





Appropriate use
Instruction handbook b maXX BM3000, BM3200, BM3300
Document no. 5.11018.11 Baumüller Nürnberg GmbH
12
of 218
2.3
2.3 Appropriate use
The device is conceived and constructed exclusively for usage compliant with its intended 
purpose described in this Instruction handbook.
The devices of the model series BM3200, BM3300 contains of a power converter in com-
bination with a servo controller. Devices are available in graduated design size and per-
formance classes. The device BM3200, BM3300 is used exclusively as a converter for 
controlling a motor.
The devices BM3000 are mains rectifier units to supply the DC link.
A device is considered as being used compliant with its intended purpose if all notes and 
information of this Instruction handbook are adhered to.
WARNING!
Danger arising from usage for an unintended purpose!
Any usage that goes beyond the intended purpose and/or any non-compliant use of 
the device can lead to dangerous situations.
Therefore:
m Only use the device compliant with its intended purpose.
m Observe all specifications of this Instruction handbook.
m Ensure that only qualified personnel work with/on this device.
m When configuring, ensure that the device is always operated within its specifica-
tions.
m Mount the device on a wall, which is sustainable.
m The device must always be operated within a control cabinet.
m Ensure that the power supply complies with the stipulated specifications.
m The device may only be operated in a technically flawless condition.
m Only operate the device in combination with components approved by Baumüller 
Nürnberg GmbH.
m Only operate the devices in secondary surrounding (e.g. an industrial environ-
ment). The device has been developed in such a manner that it fulfills the require-
ments of the category C3 according to IEC 61800-3:2012. The device is not 
intended to be connected to the public power supply. To operate the device in pri-
mary surrounding of the category C2/C1 (residential, business and commercial ar-
eas, directly on a public low-voltage power supply without an intermediate 
transformer), special measures to reduce the transient emissions (line-internal and 
radiated) must be provided for and certifiable by the system builder. Otherwise, 
EMC interference could occur without such additional measures. Whether a device 
described here can itself qualify for category C2/C1 with additional measures can-
not be guaranteed.





Safety
Instruction handbook b maXX BM3000, BM3200, BM3300
Document no. 5.11018.11 
13
of 218
2
2.4 Responsibility of the operating company
The device will be used in commercial areas. Thus, the proprietor of the device is subject 
to the legal work safety regulations.
Along with the notes on work safety in this Instruction handbook, the safety, accident pre-
vention and environmental protection regulations valid for the area of application of this 
device must be complied with. Whereby:
m Th
e operating company must inform himself about the applicable work health and safe-
ty regulations and ascertain, in a hazard ass
essment, any additional hazards that could 
arise from the special working conditions in the use area of the device. These must 
then be implemented in the form of operating instruction for operation of the device.
m Th
is Instruction handbook must be kept accessible to personnel working with the de-
vice at all times in the immediate vicinity of the device.
m Th
e specifications of the Instruction handbook must be adhered to completely and 
without exception.
m Th
e device may only be operated in a technically faultless and operationally safe con-
dition.
2.5 Protective devices
IP code
Mains rectifier
BM300X
IP 00
Compact servo unit
BM320X, BM330X, BM321X, BM331X
IP 20
All devices BM30
00, BM3200, BM3300 must be installed in an appropriate control cabi-
net to meet the IP code required in EN 61800-5-1, chapter 4.2.3.3 (BM300X: IP00, 
BM3200, BM3300: IP 30: only upper horizontal surfaces; IP 20: all other surfaces).
DANGER!
Risk of fatal injury from electrical current!
The mains rectifier BM3000 protection code is IP00.
The operator is responsible for the protection against direct and indirect contact in the 
switching cabinet.
There is an immediate risk of fatal injury if live electrical parts are contacted.
Therefore:
m The devices BM3200, BM3300 must be in operated inside of a control cabinet that 
provides protection against direct contact of the devices and at least meets the re-
quirements of EN 61800-5-1, Chapter 4.2.3.3.





Training of the personnel
Instruction handbook b maXX BM3000, BM3200, BM3300
Document no. 5.11018.11 Baumüller Nürnberg GmbH
14
of 218
2.6
2.6 Training of the personnel
In this Instruction handbook, the following qualifications are stipulated for various areas 
of activity:
m Operating personnel
n The drive system may only be operated by persons who have been specially trained, 
familiarized and authorized.
n Troubleshooting, maintenance, cleaning, maintenance and replacement may only 
be performed by trained or familiarized personnel. These persons must be familiar 
with the Instruction handbook and act accordingly.
n Initial operation and training may only be performed by qualified personnel.
m Qualified personnel
n Electrical engineers authorized by Baumüller Nürnberg GmbH, and qualified electri-
cians of the customer or a third party who have learned to install and maintain 
Baumüller drive systems and are authorized to ground and identify electrical power 
circuits and devices in accordance with the safety engineering standards of the com
-
pany.
n Qualified personnel have had occupational training or instruction in accordance with 
the respective locally applicable safety engineering standards for the upkeep and 
use of appropriate safety equipment.
WARNING!
Risk of injury due to insufficient qualifications!
Improper handling can lead to significant personal injury and material damage.
Therefore:
m Certain activities can only be performed by the persons stated in the respective 
chapters of this Instruction handbook.





Safety
Instruction handbook b maXX BM3000, BM3200, BM3300
Document no. 5.11018.11 
15
of 218
2
2.7 Personal protective equipment
The wearing of personal protective equipment is required when working in order to mini-
mize health and safety risks.
m The protective equipment necessary for each respective type of work shall always be 
worn during work.
m The personal safety signs present in each working area must be observed.
Wear for special 
work.
Protective work clothing
should be snug-fitting work clothes, with low tearing resistance, narrow sleeves and 
with no extending parts. When having longer hair use a safety hair net.
No rings or chains should be worn.
Hard hat
to protect against parts falling down and against parts, which are flying around.
Safety shoes
to protect against heavy objects falling down.
Safety gloves
to protect hands against friction, abrasion, puncturing or more severe injuries, as well 
as against the contact with hot objects.
Safety goggles
to protect the eyes against objects, which are flying around and against splashes.





Special hazards
Instruction handbook b maXX BM3000, BM3200, BM3300
Document no. 5.11018.11 Baumüller Nürnberg GmbH
16
of 218
2.8
2.8 Special hazards
In the following section, the remaining marginal risks will be stated that have been iden-
tified as a result of the hazard analysis.
Observe the safety notes listed here and the warning notes in the further chapters of this 
manual to reduce health risks and dangerous situations.
Electrical current
Danger from 
residual energy
DANGER!
Risk of fatal injury from electrical current!
There is an immediate risk of fatal injury if live electrical parts are contacted. Damage 
to the insulation or individual components can be life-threatening.
Therefore:
m Switch off the electrical power immediately in case of damage to the power supply 
insulation.
m Only allow work on the electrical system to be performed by qualified personnel.
m Switch off the current when any kind of work is being performed on the electrical 
system and ensure safety before switching on again.
DANGER!
Risk of fatal injury from electrical current!
Stored electric charge.
Discharge time of the rack system = discharge time of the device with the longest DC 
link discharge time in the rack system.
Refer to ZElectrical data– from page 35.
Therefore:
m Do not touch electrically live parts before taking into account the discharge time of 
the capacitors.
m Pay attention to the corresponding notes on the device.
m If several devices are connected e.g. with a rectifier unit, the DC link discharge can 
take a much longer time. In this case, the necessary waiting period must itself be 
determined or a measurement made to ensure the device is de-energized. This 
discharge time must be posted, together with an IEC 60417-5036 (2002-10) warn-
ing symbol, on a clearly visible location of the control cabinet.






Safety
Instruction handbook b maXX BM3000, BM3200, BM3300
Document no. 5.11018.11 
17
of 218
2
Moving compo-
nents
2.9 Fire fighting
WARNING!
Risk of injury from moving components!
Rotating components and/or components moving linearly can result in severe injury.
Therefore:
m Do not touch moving components during operation.
m Do not open any covering during operation.
m The amount of residual mechanical energy depends on the application. Powered 
components still turn/move for a certain length of time even after the power supply 
has been switched off. Ensure that adequate safety measures are taken.
DANGER!
Risk of fatal injury from electrical current!
There is a risk of electric shock if an electrically-conductive, fire-extinguishing agent 
is used.
Therefore:
m Use the following fire-extinguishing agent:

ABC powder / CO
2





Safety equipment
Instruction handbook b maXX BM3000, BM3200, BM3300
Document no. 5.11018.11 Baumüller Nürnberg GmbH
18
of 218
2.10
2.10 Safety equipment
2.11 Behavior in hazardous situations or at accidents
Preventive 
measures
m Always be prepared for accidents or fire!
m Keep first-aid equipment (e.g. first-aid kits, blankets, etc.) and fire extinguishers readily 
accessible.
m Familiarize personnel with accident signalling systems, first aid equipment and life sav-
ing equipment.
And if something 
does happen: 

respond properly
m Stop operation of the device immediately with an EMERGENCY Stop.
m Initiate first aid measures.
m Evacuate persons from the danger zone.
m Notify the responsible persons of the site.
m Alarm medical personnel and/or the fire department.
m Keep access routes clear for rescue vehicles.
WARNING!
Risk of fatal injury due to non-functional safety equipment!
Safety equipment provides for the highest level of safety in a facility. Even if safety 
equipment makes work processes more awkward, under no circumstances may they 
be circumvented. Safety can only be ensured by intact safety equipment.
Therefore:
m Before starting to work, check whether the safety equipment in good working order 
and properly installed.





Safety
Instruction handbook b maXX BM3000, BM3200, BM3300
Document no. 5.11018.11 
19
of 218
2
2.12 Signs and labels
The following symbols and information signs are located in the working area. They refer 
to the adjacencies, where they were affixed.
WARNING!
Risk of injury due to illegible symbols!
Over the course of time, stickers and symbols on the device can become dirty or oth-
erwise unrecognizable.
Therefore:
m Maintain all safety, warning and operating labels on the device in easily readable 
condition.
Electrical voltage
Only qualified personnel may work in work areas that identified with this. 
Unauthorized persons may not touch working materials marked correspondingly.
DANGER!
Risk of fatal injury from electrical current!
Stored electric charge.
Discharge time of the rack system = discharge time of the device with the longest DC 
link discharge time in the rack system.
Refer to ZElectrical data– from page 35.
Therefore:
m Do not touch before taking into account the discharge time of the capacitors and 
electrically live parts.
m Heed corresponding notes on the equipment.
m If several devices are connected e.g. with a rectifier unit, the DC link discharge can 
take a much longer time. In this case, the necessary waiting period must itself be 
determined or a measurement made to ensure the device is de-energized. This 
discharge time must be posted, together with an IEC 60417-5036 (2002-10) warn-
ing symbol, on a clearly visible location of the control cabinet.






Signs and labels
Instruction handbook b maXX BM3000, BM3200, BM3300
Document no. 5.11018.11 Baumüller Nürnberg GmbH
20
of 218
2.12
Figure 1: Signs and labels BM3200, BM3300
CAUTION!
Risk of injury due to hot surface!
When in operation, the top of the device can heat up to temperatures > 70 °C!
Therefore:
m Wear safety gloves






Without protection cover With protection cover (option)

Safety
Instruction handbook b maXX BM3000, BM3200, BM3300
Document no. 5.11018.11 
21
of 218
2
Figure 2: Signs and labels BM3000





Signs and labels
Instruction handbook b maXX BM3000, BM3200, BM3300
Document no. 5.11018.11 Baumüller Nürnberg GmbH
22
of 218
2.12
Signs and labels 
devices 

with safety level
Figure 3: Signs and labels BM3300 with safety level
NOTE!
Only a device marked with the TÜV Rheinland certification label and the safety label 
fulfills a certified safety function within the meaning of PL classification according 
ISO 13849 or SIL according EN 61800. 
new logo former logo





23
of 218
 Instruction handbook b maXX BM3000, BM3200, BM3300
Document no. 5.11018.11 
3TECHNICAL DATA
3.1 Dimensions
With the help of the following figures, the space requirements in the control cabinet are 
determined. In order to execute the necessary drilling/section please refer to ZDrilling 
templates– from page 77.
NOTE!
All dimensions in mm.







Dimensions
Instruction handbook b maXX BM3000, BM3200, BM3300
Document no. 5.11018.11 Baumüller Nürnberg GmbH
24
of 218
3.1
3.1.1 Dimensions BM3000
70


212


Figure 4: Dimensions BM3000
*) Consider minimum space, 
ZCooling– on page 34.






Technical Data
Instruction handbook b maXX BM3000, BM3200, BM3300
Document no. 5.11018.11 
25
of 218
3
3.1.2 Dimensions BM3200, BM3300
Figure 5: Dimensions BM3200, BM3300
*) Consider minimum space, 
ZCoo
ling– on page 34.
3.2 Weight
Device Weight
BM3002 approximately 1.15 kg
BM320X, BM330X approximately 2.2 kg
BM321X, BM331X approximately 2.5 kg






Operating conditions
Instruction handbook b maXX BM3000, BM3200, BM3300
Document no. 5.11018.11 Baumüller Nürnberg GmbH
26
of 218
3.3
3.3 Operating conditions
3.3.1 System types
There is a differential structure of current supply networks and it is distinguished between 
three basic types, referring to their grounding, which is accordant to DIN VDE0100 part 
300 and accordingly to IEC 60364:
m In
 a TN-system one point is directly grounded (main ground). The cabinet of the elec-
trical installation is connected via protective conductors and accordingly PE-conduc-
tors with this point.
m In
 a TT-system a point is directly grounded (main ground). The cabinet of the electric 
installation is connected to ground connections, which, however, are separated from 
the main ground. 
m In
 an IT-system there is no direct connection between active conductors (L1, L2, L3, 
N) and grounded parts (PE). The cabinets of the electrical installation are grounded. 
The separation is reached, by the use of an isolating transformer or with the use of an 
independent current source (generator, battery).
If there is an adequate low-impedance grounding within the TN- or the TT-network, then 
a
 line-side fuse is activated. A high-impedance grounding does not activate the fuse, so 
that the ground currents (error current) can be potentially dangerous. For this reason, cir-
cuit breakers are used for the error current monitoring.
At a short-circuit to ground, no ground current can flow and the line-side fuses cannot be 
activated, by which the operation can be kept up. Only a second short-circuit to ground at 
another phase would cause an current error, which can trigger a fuse. In order to detect 
the first short-circuit to ground an insulation monitor and for the second short-circuit to 
ground, a current error monitoring, are necessary.
Supported system 
ty
pes
NOTICE!
The operation of the BM3000 devices is possible with all power supply networks.
The operation of the BM3200, BM3300 devices is possible with TT- and TN-net-
works.
The common network types in the USA are differentiate clearly from the European 
networks. Besides the Solidly Grounded Wye, which is similar to the TN-S-system, 
there is also a Corner Grounded Delta (this differs to the description in the IEC). The 
BM3200, BM3300 may not be operated here.
An operation with DC-link connection and use of a active mains rectifier is forbidden. 





Technical Data
Instruction handbook b maXX BM3000, BM3200, BM3300
Document no. 5.11018.11 
27
of 218
3
3.3.2 Requirements to the energy supply: power supply
1)
If the voltage falls below U
ACmin
 for t > 0,1 s the error „Power unit not ready-to-operate“ is generated.
2)
The rated voltage is 3 x 400 V
At lower supply voltages the output power of the device reduces, see correction factor at modified environmental conditions, ZSupply 
voltage– on page 31.
3)
The control voltage must accord to PELV (EN 61800-5-1, chapter 3.21) and accordingly SELV (EN 61800-5-1, chapter 3.35).
At a control voltage < 24 V the ventilator power is reduced. Therefore, it can be necessary, that the output currents also be reduced. 
4)
Rate of change of system frequency max. 1 Hz/s (EN 61000-2-4, class 3)
BM3000 BM3200, BM3300
Power supply
(also see ZSystem types– from page 26)
IT-system, 
TN-/TT-system
TN-/TT-system
Inductance (sum of supply inductance and the 
power choke inductance)
Min. u
k
 = 0 %, max. u
k
 = 4 %
Rated supply voltage/frequency 
1) 2) 
(U
AC
)
3 x 400 V, 50/60 Hz
1 x 230 V, 50/60 Hz
1 x 400 V, 50/60 Hz
3 x 400 V, 50/60 Hz
Absolute supply voltage minimum
1) 2) 
(U
ACmin
)
Absolute supply voltage maximum
1) 2) 
(U
ACmax
)
528 V / 50/60 Hz
110 V
 
/ 50/60 Hz
528 V / 50/60 Hz
Absolute frequency minimum 
4)
Absolute frequency maximum 
4)
47 Hz
63 Hz
Overvoltage category
EN 61800-5-1, chapt. 4.3.6
III
Harmonic components (power supply voltage)
EN 61800-3, chapter 5.2.1, class 3
THD
U
 b 12 %
Power Supply voltage asymmetry
EN 61000-2-4, tab. 1, class 3
max. 3 %
Commutation notch
EN 61800-3, chapter 5.2.1, class 3
setback depth < 40 %, area < 250 % x degree
Voltage drop
EN 61800-3:2004 and A1:2012
10 % to 80 % 
1)
Voltage variations/deviations
EN 61200-2-4, Class 3
+/-10 %
+10 % to -15 % at a time of b 1 min
Control voltage 
3) 
(U
DC
)
c
omplying with EN 61131-2:1994, table 7
-
+ 24 V -15 % / +20 %
Max. short-circuit strength power supply
only necessary to comply with UL508C
-
5000 A








Operating conditions
Instruction handbook b maXX BM3000, BM3200, BM3300
Document no. 5.11018.11 Baumüller Nürnberg GmbH
28
of 218
3.3
3.3.3 Requirements to the control voltage / 24 V-supply
Figure 6: Control voltage / 24V-supply
The power supply for the 24 V supply voltage must provide the rated power, at least, 
which accords to the sum of the 24 V-supply voltage of all devices. 
3.3.4 Requirements to the motor
The BM3200, BM3300 was prepared for the operation of three-phase motors with a mo-
tor terminal voltage of 3 x 350 V (typical for servo motors of Baumüller) or 3 x 400 V (typ-
ical for standard asynchronous motors and for customer-specific special motors of 
Baumüller). The motors are to be operated wye-connected. The rated DC-link voltage is 
540 V
DC
. In braking operation it must be expected, that the DC-link voltage increases to 
780 V or 800 V. The connected motor must be constructed for these DC-link voltages. 
The use of the devices is also possible at smaller voltages, e.g. 3 x 230 V. However, this 
implies that the used three-current motors for the operation at inverters with a voltage of 
up to 800 V DC-link voltage are designed, because the ballast resistor voltage threshold 
remains unchanged (see ZElectrical data– from page 35). Thus, in these cases, three-
phase motors with U
DC rated
  540 V, must be used, only.
BM3200
BM3300
BM3200
BM3300
BM3200
BM3300
BM3200
BM3300







Technical Data
Instruction handbook b maXX BM3000, BM3200, BM3300
Document no. 5.11018.11 
29
of 218
3
3.3.5 Required environmental conditions
1)
For an operation in an environment of category C2 according to IEC 61800-3:2012 additional measures may be required. 
In this case the system manufacturer/operator must provide evidence, that these additional measures are effective and that the limit 
values specified in IEC 61800-3 of category C2 are complied with. 
2)
See correction factors at modified environment conditions, ZEnvironmental temperature– on page 31.
3)
See correction factors at modified environment conditions, ZInstallation altitude– on page 30.
BM3000 BM3200, BM3300
Transportation temperature range -25 °C to +70 °C
Transportation climate classification 
EN 60721-3-2
2 K 3
Storage temperature range -25 °C to +55 °C
Storage climate classification
EN 60721-3-1
1 K 4
Operation environment Industrial supply network
 1)
Operation temperature range min. 5 °C to max. 40 °C min. 5 °C to max. 55 °C 
(with derating above 40 °C) 
2)
Operation climate classification
EN 60721-3-3
3 K 3
Installation altitude up to 2000 m altitude
(with derating above 1000 m) 
3)
Humidity (operation)
EN 60721-3-3
relative humidity: 5 % to 85 % non-condensing
and
absolute humidity: 1 g/m
3
 to 25 g/m
3
Ionizing and non-ionizing radiation  < measurable range
Vibration, shock and repetitive shock 
EN 61800-5-1, section 5.2.6.4 vibration test
max. 0.5 g operating (1 g tested)
Pollution degree
EN 61800-5-1, table 6, tab. 2
2
NOTICE!
Normally, only non-conductive pollution occurs. Any conductive pollution, if for a 
short-term or permanently, is forbidden and can cause the destruction of the device. 
The customer is responsible for destructions, which are caused by conductive mate-
rials.







Operating conditions
Instruction handbook b maXX BM3000, BM3200, BM3300
Document no. 5.11018.11 Baumüller Nürnberg GmbH
30
of 218
3.3
3.3.6 Correction factors at modified operational conditions
If the devices BM3200, BM3300 are used at operational conditions, which cause different 
correction factors, then all correction factors for the permitted output power and accord-
ingly the output current, must be taken into account by multiplication at the same time.
The following correction factors are to be considered if nothing other is specified at the 
„Technical data“ of the device:
3.3.6.1 Installation altitude
The output power must be reduced against the rated power, according to the following 
figure, if the devices BM3000, BM3200, BM3300 are used above an altitude of 1000 m, 
no operation is permitted above an altitude of 2000 m.
Figure 7: Reducing of output power in dependence of altitude
NOTE!
The temperature of the cold plate temperature must be higher or equal to the sur-
rounding temperature to prevent condensation.
NOTE!
It is no derating necessary while single phase operation of a three phase device 
BM3201-XT, BM3301X-XT.
Output Power
   Rated Power   
Altitude





Technical Data
Instruction handbook b maXX BM3000, BM3200, BM3300
Document no. 5.11018.11 
31
of 218
3
3.3.6.2 Environmental temperature
The devices BM3200, BM3300 are provided for an environment temperature of 
T
rated
 = 40 °C. At usage in environments with a deviating temperature between 40 °C and 
55 °C the permitted output current (I
O
) is to be calculated according to the following for-
mula:
The coolant temperature corresponds to the environmental temperature.
3.3.6.3 Supply voltage 
3-phase operation

above rated 
supply voltage
The rated voltage is 3 x 400 V
At supp
ly voltages above the rated supply voltage, the output current is to be reduced at 
constant output power, accordingly. 
Figure 8: Output current dependent on supply voltage
NOTE!
It is no derating necessary while single phase operation of a three phase device 
BM3201-XT, BM3301X-XT.
I
O
I
O 40°C
1
Coolant temperature - 40°C
°C
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
003


–


=

Output voltage device
Supply voltage
180 V 400 V 528 V
100 %
50 %






Operating conditions
Instruction handbook b maXX BM3000, BM3200, BM3300
Document no. 5.11018.11 Baumüller Nürnberg GmbH
32
of 218
3.3
3-phase operation

below rated 
supply voltage 
The rated voltage is 3 x 400 V
At smaller supply voltages the output power of the device reduces.
1-phase operation

above rated 
supply voltage
The rated voltage is 3 x 400 V
At supply voltages above the rated supply voltage, the output current is to be reduced at 
constant output power, accordingly. 
Figure 10: Output current dependent on supply voltage
Output Power Device
P
rated
Continuous operation 
permitted
Supply voltage
Figure 9: Output power dependent on supply voltage
If the output current is multiplied with the output voltage, the output power of the device is pro-
vided.
S
output
 = U
output
 x I
output
 x 3
In order to obtain the specified curve/surface, it is necessary, that the output current is reduced to 
a value between 400 and 528 V.
207 V
400 V
528 V
100 %
51 %

Output voltage device
Supply voltage





Technical Data
Instruction handbook b maXX BM3000, BM3200, BM3300
Document no. 5.11018.11 
33
of 218
3
1-phase operation

below rated 
supply voltage 
The rated voltage is 3 x 400 V
At smaller supply voltages the output power of the device reduces.
3.3.6.4 DC-link voltage
Output current [%]
DC-link voltage [V]
At DC-link voltages above the rated supply voltage the output current must be reduced at 
constant output power.
Figure 12: Output current dependent on DC-link voltage
Output power device
P
rated
Continuous operation 
permitted
Supply voltage
Figure 11: Output power dependent on supply voltage
If the output current is multiplied with the output voltage, the output power of the device is pro-
vided.
S
output
 = U
output
 x I
output
 x 3





Operating conditions
Instruction handbook b maXX BM3000, BM3200, BM3300
Document no. 5.11018.11 Baumüller Nürnberg GmbH
34
of 218
3.3
3.3.7 Cooling
BM3000
1) 
Recommendation: 
In order to avoid dew, the temperature of the water inlet is greater or equal to the interior temperature of the 
device. With other cooling water temperatures as mentioned above please contact Baumüller Nürnberg.
2) 
Notes referring to cold plate
Cold plate is an particularly efficient cooling version. Heat dissipation is made via two contact surfaces. One 
is in the control cabinet as a mounting platform or at the machine base. The other one is a cold plate on the 
rear of the unit. In order to have an optimum heat flow, there are high demands to this functional surface re
-
ferring to the surface roughness and the evenness. A light damage of the surface can lead to a significant 
deterioration of the heat dissipation to the mounting plate.

The sensitive functional surface therefore must be protected against damage when handling the parts.
BM3200/BM3300
1) 
Air temperature in the entire suction area of the device.
2) 
The cooling air requirement must at least accord to a free blowing process of a device. A free blowing process 
means, that the air in- and output can take place unimpeded. At installation of the device into a control cab
-
inet, it may be necessary, to insert additional fans, to cover the necessary cooling air requirement. If the nec-
essary cooling air requirement of the power heat sink is not provided, the output power of the device must be 
reduced. 
Cooling water temperature 
1)
Min. 0 °C to max. 40 °C
Temperature of mounting wall 
2)
Min. cooling air temperature up to max. 40 °C
Cooling air temperature 
1)
Min. 0 °C to max. 55 °C
Rated temperature = 40 °C
Cooling air requirement 
2)
See ZElectrical data– from page 35






Technical Data
Instruction handbook b maXX BM3000, BM3200, BM3300
Document no. 5.11018.11 
35
of 218
3
3.4 Electrical data
3.4.1 Electrical data BM3002
1) 
All rated values refer to a supply voltage of 400 V at 50 Hz and an environmental temperature of 40 °C.
BM3002 
Input rated power output 
1)
18 kVA
Input rated current (I
eff
)
 1)
28 A
Distortion factor of the input current (THD
I
) 110 % 10 %
DC-link voltage depends on power supply,
rated value 
 1)
540 V
DC 
at U
power supply
 = 3 x 400 V
Max. sum of DC-link capacitance within the DC-link 18 mF
Waiting time between 2 charging processes with exter-
nal connected DC-link capacitance
Connectable load to the DC-link 15 kW
Switch on ready-to-operate after depends on the external 
capacitance
Power loss referring to power connection 50 W
Power loss referring to control voltage  max. 2 W
C
ext
U
power supply
  2

400
------------------------------------------------






Electrical data
Instruction handbook b maXX BM3000, BM3200, BM3300
Document no. 5.11018.11 Baumüller Nürnberg GmbH
36
of 218
3.4
3.4.2 Electrical data BM3X01-XT/BM3X11-XT
BM3X01 
3-phase/3 x 400 V
BM3X01 
1-phase/1 x 400 V
Input rated power output 
1)
4.2 kVA 3.9 kVA
Input rated current (I
eff
)
 1) 2) 3)
6 A 5.6 A
Distortion factor of the input current (THD
I
)
1)
118 % 130 %
Input peak current (I
eff
) 
1) 2) 3) 
10.4 A 5.6 A
DC-link voltage power supply-dependent/rating 540 V
DC
DC-link capacitance (internal) 235 µF
DC-link capacitance (external) see DC link connection of additional capacities 
fr
om ZPage 116–
DC-link discharge time (internal DC-link capacitance) ca. 450 s
Output voltage
 
(U
AC
) 
1) 4)
0 ... 400 V
Output frequency at 4 kHz 
5) 6)
0 ... 450 Hz
Output rated current
 
(I
AC
) 
1)4)7)8)9)
at 2 kHz 
5)
 5 A 2 A
Output rated current (I
AC
) 
1)4)7)8)9)
at 4 kHz 
5)
 5 A 2 A
Output rated current
 
(I
AC
) 
1)4)7)8)9)
at 8 kHz 
5)
 3.5 A 2 A
Output rated current (I
AC
) 
1)4)7)8)9)
at 16 kHz 
5)
 2.5 A 2 A
Output peak current (I
AC
) 
1)4)7)8)9)
at 2 kHz 
5)
 10 A 2 A
Output peak current
 
(I
AC
)
 1)4)7)8)9)
at 4 kHz 
5)
 10 A 2 A
Output peak current (I
AC
) 
1)4)7)8)9)
at 8 kHz 
5)
7 A 2 A
Output peak current
 
(I
AC
)
 1)4)7)8)9)
at 16 kHz 
5)
 5 A 2 A
Max. peak current time 60 s
Break resistor start-up voltage 785 V
Break resistor peak power 1200 W for max. 150 ms
Average ballast power 100 W
Switch on ready-to-operate after  4 s
Max. upload time  0.5 s
Power loss referring to power connection 70 W 50 W
Power loss referring to control voltage max. 30 W
Cooling air requirement 11 m
3
/h
with internal ballast resistor BM3X01-XTXX-XXXXX-B-X
XXXX-
Footnotes see ZPage 43–.







Technical Data
Instruction handbook b maXX BM3000, BM3200, BM3300
Document no. 5.11018.11 
37
of 218
3
with internal ballast resistor BM3X11-XTXX-XXXXX-B-XXXXX- 
Footnotes see ZPage 43–.
BM3X11 
3-phase/3 x 400 V
BM3X11 
1-phase/1 x 400 V
Input rated power output 
1)
6.9 kVA 3.9 kVA
Input rated current (I
eff
)
 1) 2) 3)
10.4 A 5.6 A
Distortion factor of the input current (THD
I
)
1)
77 % 130 %
DC-link voltage power supply-dependent/rating 540 V
DC
DC-link capacitance (internal) 235 µF
DC-link capacitance (external) see DC link connection of additional 
capacities from ZPage 116–
DC-link discharge time (internal DC-link capacitance) ca. 450 s
Output voltage
 
(U
AC
) 
1) 4)
0 ... 400 V
Output frequency at 4 kHz 
5) 6)
0 ... 450 Hz
Output rated current
 
(I
AC
) 
1)4)7)8)9)
at 2 kHz 
5)
 10 A 2 A
Output rated current (I
AC
) 
1)4)7)8)9)
at 4 kHz 
5)
 10 A 2 A
Output rated current
 
(I
AC
) 
1)4)7)8)9)
at 8 kHz 
5)
7 A 2 A
Output rated current (I
AC
) 
1)4)7)8)9)
at 16 kHz 
5)
 5 A 2 A
Ballast start-up voltage 785 V
Ballast peak power 1200 W for max. 150 ms
Average ballast power 100 W
Switch on ready-to-operate after  4 s
Max. upload time  0.5 s
Power loss referring to power connection 100 W 50 W
Power loss referring to control voltage max. 30 W
Cooling air requirement 13 m
3
/h







Electrical data
Instruction handbook b maXX BM3000, BM3200, BM3300
Document no. 5.11018.11 Baumüller Nürnberg GmbH
38
of 218
3.4
3.4.3 Electrical data BM3X02-XT, BM3X03-XT, BM3X04-XT, 400 V
a) 
with internal ballast resistor BM3X02-XTXX-XXXXX-B-XXXXX- 
b) 
without internal ballast resistor BM3X02-XTXX-XXXXX-E-XXXXX- 
Footnotes see ZPage 43–.
BM3X02 
3-phase/3 x 400 V
BM3X03
3-phase/3 x 400 V
BM3X04
3-phase/3 x 400 V
Input rated power output 
1)
1.3 kVA 2.3 kVA 4.2 kVA
Input rated current (I
eff
)
 1) 2) 3)
1.8 A 3.3 A 6 A
Distortion factor of the input current (THD
I
)
1)
118 %
Input peak current (I
eff
) 
1) 2) 3) 
6.3 A 11.4 A 15.6 A
DC-link voltage power supply-dependent/rating 540 V
DC
DC-link capacitance (internal) 235 µF
DC-link capacitance (external)
(only devices BM3X0X-XTXX-XXXXX-B)
see DC link connection of additional capacities 
from ZPage 116–
DC-link discharge time (internal DC-link capacitance) ca. 450 s
Output voltage
 
(U
AC
) 
1) 4)
0 ... 400 V
Output frequency at 4 kHz 
5) 6)
0 ... 450 Hz
Output rated current
 
(I
AC
) 
1)4)7)8)9)
at 2 kHz 
5)
 1.5 A 2.7 A  5 A
Output rated current (I
AC
) 
1)4)7)8)9)
at 4 kHz 
5)
 1.5 A 2.7 A  5 A
Output rated current
 
(I
AC
) 
1)4)7)8)9)
at 8 kHz 
5)
1.1 A 1.9 A 3.5 A
Output rated current (I
AC
) 
1)4)7)8)9)
at 16 kHz 
5)
0.8 A 1.3 A 2.5 A
Output peak current (I
AC
) 
1)4)7)8)9)
at 2 kHz 
5)
 6 A  11 A  15 A
Output peak current
 
(I
AC
)
 1)4)7)8)9)
at 4 kHz 
5)
 6 A  11 A  15 A
Output peak current (I
AC
) 
1)4)7)8)9)
at 8 kHz 
5)
4.2 A 7.7 A 10.5 A
Output peak current
 
(I
AC
)
 1)4)7)8)9)
at 16 kHz 
5)
3 A 5.4 A 7.4 A
Max. peak current time 60 s 30 s
Ballast start-up voltage 785 V
Ballast peak power, internal ballast resistor 
a)
1200 W for max. 150 ms
Average ballast power, internal ballast resistor 
a)
100 W
Permitted ballast current (Î), external ballast resistor 
b)
max. 7.0 A
Ballast resistor, external ballast resistor 
b)
 111   61 
Ballast peak power, external ballast resistor 
b)
5.5 kW 10 kW
Permitted continuous power of external ballast resistor 
b)
 2.5 kW  5 kW
Switch on ready-to-operate after  4 s
Max. upload time  0.5 s
Power loss referring to power connection 70 W
Power loss referring to control voltage max. 30 W
Cooling air requirement 11 m
3
/h







Technical Data
Instruction handbook b maXX BM3000, BM3200, BM3300
Document no. 5.11018.11 
39
of 218
3
Footnotes see ZPage 43–.
BM3X02 
1-phase/1 x 400 V
BM3X03
1-phase/1 x 400 V
BM3X04
1-phase/1 x 400 V
Input rated power output 
1)
1.2 kVA 1.4 kVA
Input rated current (I
eff
)
 1) 2) 3)
4.2 A 5.6 A
Distortion factor of the input current (THD
I
)
1)
130 %
Input peak current (I
eff
) 
1) 2) 3) 
5.6 A
DC-link voltage power supply-dependent/rating 540 V
DC
DC-link capacitance (internal), external not permitted 235 µF
DC-link discharge time (internal DC-link capacitance) ca. 450 s
Output voltage
 
(U
AC
) 
1) 4)
0 ... 400 V
Output frequency at 4 kHz 
5) 6)
0 ... 450 Hz
Output rated current
 
(I
AC
) 
1)4)7)8)9)
at 2 kHz 
5)
 2 A
Output rated current (I
AC
) 
1)4)7)8)9)
at 4 kHz 
5)
 2 A
Output rated current
 
(I
AC
) 
1)4)7)8)9)
at 8 kHz 
5)
 2 A
Output rated current (I
AC
) 
1)4)7)8)9)
at 16 kHz 
5)
 2 A
Output peak current (I
AC
) 
1)4)7)8)9)
at 2 kHz 
5)
 2 A
Output peak current
 
(I
AC
)
 1)4)7)8)9)
at 4 kHz 
5)
 2 A
Output peak current (I
AC
) 
1)4)7)8)9)
at 8 kHz 
5)
 2 A
Output peak current
 
(I
AC
)
 1)4)7)8)9)
at 16 kHz 
5)
 2 A
Ballast start-up voltage 785 V
Ballast peak power, internal ballast resistor 
a)
1200 W for max. 150 ms
Average ballast power, internal ballast resistor 
a)
100 W
Permitted ballast current (Î), external ballast resistor 
b)
max. 7.0 A
Ballast resistor, external ballast resistor 
b)
 111 
Ballast peak power, external ballast resistor 
b)
5.5 kW
Permitted continuous power of external ballast resistor 
b)
 2.5 kW
Switch on ready-to-operate after  4 s
Max. upload time  0,5 s
Power loss referring to power connection 50 W
Power loss referring to control voltage max. 30 W
Cooling air requirement 11 m
3
/h






Electrical data
Instruction handbook b maXX BM3000, BM3200, BM3300
Document no. 5.11018.11 Baumüller Nürnberg GmbH
40
of 218
3.4
3.4.4 Electrical data BM3X12-XT, BM3X13-XT, 400 V
a) 
with internal ballast resistor BM3X02-XTXX-XXXXX-B-XXXXX- 
b) 
without internal ballast resistor BM3X02-XTXX-XXXXX-E-XXXXX-
BM3X12
3-phase/3 x 400 V
BM3X13
3-phase/3 x 400 V
Input rated power output 
1)
5.4 kVA 6.9 kVA
Input rated current (I
eff
)
 1) 2) 3)
7.8 A 10.4 A
Distortion factor of the input current (THD
I
)
1)
118 % 77 %
Input peak current (I
eff
) 
1) 2) 3) 
20.8 A 20.8 A
DC-link voltage power supply-dependent/rating 540 V
DC
DC-link capacitance (internal) 235 µF
DC-link capacitance (external)
(only devices BM3X0X-XTXX-XXXXX-B)
see DC link connection of additional capaci-
ties from ZPage 116–
DC-link discharge time (internal DC-link capacitance) ca. 450 s
Output voltage
 
(U
AC
) 
1) 4)
0 ... 400 V
Output frequency at 4 kHz 
5) 6)
0 ... 450 Hz
Output rated current
 
(I
AC
) 
1)4)7)8)9)
at 2 kHz 
5)
 6.5 A  10 A
Output rated current (I
AC
) 
1)4)7)8)9)
at 4 kHz 
5)
 6.5 A  10 A
Output rated current
 
(I
AC
) 
1)4)7)8)9)
at 8 kHz 
5)
4.8 A 7 A
Output rated current (I
AC
) 
1)4)7)8)9)
at 16 kHz 
5)
3.4 A 5 A
Output peak current (I
AC
) 
1)4)7)8)9)
at 2 kHz 
5)
 20 A
Output peak current
 
(I
AC
)
 1)4)7)8)9)
at 4 kHz 
5)
 20 A
Output peak current (I
AC
) 
1)4)7)8)9)
at 8 kHz 
5)
14 A
Output peak current
 
(I
AC
)
 1)4)7)8)9)
at 16 kHz 
5)
10 A
Max. peak current time 10 s
Ballast start-up voltage 785 V
Ballast peak power, internal ballast resistor 
a)
1200 W for max. 150 ms
Average ballast power, internal ballast resistor 
a)
100 W
Permitted ballast current (Î), external ballast resistor 
b)
max. 12.8 A
Ballast resistor, external ballast resistor 
b)
 61 
Ballast peak power, external ballast resistor 
b)
10 kW
Permitted continuous power of external ballast resistor 
b)
 5 kW
Switch on ready-to-operate after  4 s
Max. upload time  0.5 s
Power loss referring to power connection 70 W
Power loss referring to control voltage max. 30 W
Cooling air requirement 11 m
3
/h






Technical Data
Instruction handbook b maXX BM3000, BM3200, BM3300
Document no. 5.11018.11 
41
of 218
3
BM3X12
1-phase/1 x 400 V
BM3X13
1-phase/1 x 400 V
Input rated power output 
1)
1.4 kVA
Input rated current (I
eff
)
 1) 2) 3)
5.6 A
Distortion factor of the input current (THD
I
)
1)
130 %
Input peak current (I
eff
) 
1) 2) 3) 
5.6 A
DC-link voltage power supply-dependent/rating 540 V
DC
DC-link capacitance (internal), external not permitted 235 µF
DC-link discharge time (internal DC-link capacitance) ca. 450 s
Output voltage
 
(U
AC
) 
1) 4)
0 ... 400 V
Output frequency at 4 kHz 
5) 6)
0 ... 450 Hz
Output rated current
 
(I
AC
) 
1)4)7)8)9)
at 2 kHz 
5)
 2 A
Output rated current (I
AC
) 
1)4)7)8)9)
at 4 kHz 
5)
 2 A
Output rated current
 
(I
AC
) 
1)4)7)8)9)
at 8 kHz 
5)
 2 A
Output rated current (I
AC
) 
1)4)7)8)9)
at 16 kHz 
5)
 2 A
Output peak current (I
AC
) 
1)4)7)8)9)
at 2 kHz 
5)
 2 A
Output peak current
 
(I
AC
)
 1)4)7)8)9)
at 4 kHz 
5)
 2 A
Output peak current (I
AC
) 
1)4)7)8)9)
at 8 kHz 
5)
 2 A
Output peak current
 
(I
AC
)
 1)4)7)8)9)
at 16 kHz 
5)
 2 A
Ballast start-up voltage 785 V
Ballast peak power, internal ballast resistor 
a)
1200 W for max. 150 ms
Average ballast power, internal ballast resistor 
a)
100 W
Permitted ballast current (Î), external ballast resistor 
b)
max. 12.8 A
Ballast resistor, external ballast resistor 
b)
 61 
Ballast peak power, external ballast resistor 
b)
10 kW
Permitted continuous power of external ballast resistor 
b)
 5 kW
Switch on ready-to-operate after  4 s
Max. upload time  0.5 s
Power loss referring to power connection 70 W
Power loss referring to control voltage max. 30 W
Cooling air requirement 11 m
3
/h





Electrical data
Instruction handbook b maXX BM3000, BM3200, BM3300
Document no. 5.11018.11 Baumüller Nürnberg GmbH
42
of 218
3.4
3.4.5 Electrical data BM3XXX-XE, 230 V
a) 
with internal ballast resistor BM3X02-XEXX-XXXXX-B-XXXXX- 
b) 
without internal ballast resistor BM3X02-XEXX-XXXXX-E-XXXXX-
BM3X02
1-phase/
1 x 230 V
BM3X03
1-phase/
1 x 230 V
BM3X04
1-phase/
1 x 230 V
BM3X12
 1-phase/
1 x 230 V
BM3X13
 1-phase/
1 x 230 V
Input rated power output 
1)
0.8 kVA 1.1 kVA 1.9 kVA
Input rated current (I
eff
)
 1) 2) 3)
3.5 A 4.5 A 5.6 A
Distortion factor of the input current (THD
I
)
1)
95 %
Input peak current (I
eff
) 
1) 2) 3) 
 5.6 A
DC-link voltage power supply-dependent/rating 300 V
DC
DC-link capacitance (internal), external not permitted 235 µF
DC-link discharge time (internal DC-link capacitance) ca. 450 s
Output voltage
 
(U
AC
) 
1) 4)
0 ... 230 V
Output frequency at 4 kHz 
5) 6)
0 ... 450 Hz
Maximum output power 0.6 kW 1.08 kW 1.5 kW 
10)
Output rated current
 
(I
AC
) 
1)4)7)8)9)
at 2 kHz 
5)
 1.5 A 2.7 A  5 A  6.5 A  10 A
Output rated current (I
AC
) 
1)4)7)8)9)
at 4 kHz 
5)
 1.5 A 2.7 A  5 A  6.5 A  10 A
Output rated current
 
(I
AC
) 
1)4)7)8)9)
at 8 kHz 
5)
1.1 A 1.9 A 3.5 A 4.8 A 7 A
Output rated current (I
AC
) 
1)4)7)8)9)
at 16 kHz 
5)
0.8 A 1.3 A 2.5 A 3.4 A 5 A
Output peak current (I
AC
) 
1)4)7)8)9)
at 2 kHz 
5)
 6 A  11 A  15 A  20 A
Output peak current
 
(I
AC
)
 1)4)7)8)9)
at 4 kHz 
5)
 6 A  11 A  15 A  20 A
Output peak current (I
AC
) 
1)4)7)8)9)
at 8 kHz 
5)
4.2 A 7.7 A 10.5 A 14 A
Output peak current
 
(I
AC
)
 1)4)7)8)9)
at 16 kHz 
5)
3 A 5.4 A 7.4 A 10 A
Max. peak current time 60 s 30 s 10 s
Ballast start-up voltage 785 V
Ballast peak power, internal ballast resistor 
a)
1200 W for max. 150 ms
Average ballast power, internal ballast resistor 
a)
100 W
Permitted ballast current (Î), external ballast resistor 
b)
max. 7.0 A max. 12.8 A
Ballast resistor, external ballast resistor 
b)
 111   61 
Ballast peak power, external ballast resistor 
b)
5.5 kW 10 kW
Permitted continuous power of external ballast resistor 
b)
 2.5 kW  5 kW
Switch on ready-to-operate after  4 s
Max. upload time  0.5 s
Power loss referring to power connection 50 W
Power loss referring to control voltage max. 30 W
Cooling air requirement 11 m
3
/h





Technical Data
Instruction handbook b maXX BM3000, BM3200, BM3300
Document no. 5.11018.11 
43
of 218
3
1) 
All rated values refer to a supply voltage of 230 V (single phase) and accordingly 400 V (3-phase) at 50 Hz, 
a control voltage of 24 V and an environmental temperature of 40 °C.
2) 
The input current must be reduced be a temperature of 40 °C and 55 °C, see correction factors at modified 
environmental conditions, ZEnvir
onmental temperature– on page 31. 
3) 
At the rated supply voltage, the device takes up the rated-/peak-input current. At the input voltage above the 
rated supply voltage, the input current must accordingly be reduced at a constant output power, see correc-
tion factors at modified environmental conditions, ZSupply voltage– on page 3
1.
4) 
The output voltage is a pulsed direct current (DC). The operating range refers to the RMS value of the fun-
damental wave.
5) 
The range of the output frequency is based on a stationary operation in the linear range of the PWM, i. e. 
without overmodulation.
The quality of the generated output voltages depends on the ratio between output frequency and current con-
troller frequency f
I-R 
( f
I-R 
= 1/cycle time current controller).
The maximum output frequency f
max
 , generated with high quality, is calculated as follows:
f
max
f
I-R
K
pf
--------
 , typical  K
Pf
18=


Furthermore the controller sets an upper limit for
 the output frequency of 599 Hz (please contact the respon-
sible Baumüller sales department, keyword: export restriction).
The range of the output frequency is defined as follows:
PWM frequency Current controller cycle time Range of the output frequency
2 kHz 250 µs 0 - 225 Hz
4 kHz 125 µs 0 - 450 Hz
8/16 kHz 62.5 µs 0 - 599 Hz (900 Hz 
*)
)

*)
 900 Hz could be generated by the controller
The device is able to generate output voltages with frequencies between f
max
 and 599 Hz and the controller 
allows that, however the quality of this voltages cannot be guaranteed.
Typical the devices are marked with the max output frequency at 4 kHz switching frequency: 0 ... 450 Hz.
6) 
Current derating see ZFrequency-output-dependent current derating– from page 44.
7) 
At a DC-link-rated voltage, the device supplies the rated-/maximum-output current. At DC link input voltages 
above the rated-supply voltage, the output current must accordingly be reduced at a constant output power, 
see correction factors at modified environmental conditions, ZDC-
link voltage– on page 33.
8) 
The overload time is dependent of the motor current and of the heat sink temperature and is determined by 
the Ixt-monitoring of the device. 
9) 
The continuously permitted output current must be reduced complying with ZFrequency-output-dependent 
current derating– on page 44, if the statical output frequency is lower than 15 Hz and the frequency remains 
between 0 and 15 Hz for over 5 seconds.
10) 
The output power must not exceed the limit value of 1.5 kW, it is limited by the controller.











Electrical data
Instruction handbook b maXX BM3000, BM3200, BM3300
Document no. 5.11018.11 Baumüller Nürnberg GmbH
44
of 218
3.4
3.4.6 Frequency-output-dependent current derating
All Baumüller devices were developed, so that the specified rated-output current is per-
manently permitted, i. e. in the S1-operation, at an electrical output frequency of more 
than 15 Hz. If the statical output frequency of the inverter is smaller than 15 Hz and the 
frequency is longer than 5 seconds between 0 and 15 Hz, then the permitted, permanent 
output current must be reduced, conforming to the following characteristic curve. 
Among others, in the following a few examples are shown:
n applications with speed control without positioning or 
n applications, where at standstill current must be applied in order to maintain a torque / 
a force or
n applications, which cause a blocking of the mechanics, e. g. when starting a cold 
extruder. 
Consequently the following operations are not concerned: 
n typical positioning operations
n applications, where a higher-level control contains a standstill and block monitoring. 
As long as the derating range is passed fast enough, the use of I
rated
 is permitted. Passing 
fast enough, means that the frequency change is 15 Hz/s.
Derating of the motor-side inverter-output current I against the rating-output current 
I
rated
, in dependence on the static inverter-output frequency f.
Static inverter-output frequency f
Figure 13: Derating at a static inverter frequency < 15 Hz
          I         
       I
rated





Technical Data
Instruction handbook b maXX BM3000, BM3200, BM3300
Document no. 5.11018.11 
45
of 218
3
3.4.7 Load cycle according to EN61800-6
Operation with 
constant load
Figure 14: Typical current-time-diagram: Operation at constant load
I
b
 at 2 kHz I
b
 at 4 kHz I
b
 at 8 kHz I
b
 at 16 kHz
BM3X01 5 A (100 % I
rated
) 5 A (100 % I
rated
) 3.5 A (70 % I
rated
) 2.5 A (50 % I
rated
)
BM3X11 10 A (100 % I
rated
) 10 A (100 % I
rated
)  7 A (70 % I
rated
)  5 A (50 % I
rated
)
Intermittent load 
cycle with peak 
value
Figure 15: Typical current-time-diagram: Intermittent load cycle with peak value
t
p
t
o
+I
rated
2
 t
p
I
p
2
=

this term is valid for possible load cycles:
Example load cycles:
t
o
t
p
 with I
p
 = 150 % I
rated
t
p
 with I
p
 = 200 % I
rated
BM3X01 180 s 95 s (I
p
=7.5 A) 55 s (I
p
=10 A)





Electrical data
Instruction handbook b maXX BM3000, BM3200, BM3300
Document no. 5.11018.11 Baumüller Nürnberg GmbH
46
of 218
3.4
Intermittent load 
cycle 
Figure 16: Typical current-time-diagram: Intermittent load cycle
t
b
t
o
+I
rated
2
 t
p
I
p
2
t
b
I
b
2
+=

t
b
 with I
b
 = 100 % I
rated
t
p
 with I
p
 = 150% I
rated
t
p
 with I
p
 = 200 % I
rated
BM3X01 60 s (I
b
 = 5 A) 4 s (I
P
 = 7,5 A) 2 s (I
p
 = 10 A)
This term is valid for possible load cycles:
Example load cycles:
t
b
 with I
b
 = 60 % I
rated
t
p
 with I
p
 = 150% I
rated
t
p
 with I
p
 = 200 %  I
rated
BM3X01 120 s (I
b
 = 3 A) 45 s (I
P
 = 7.5 A) 25 s (I
P
 = 10 A)





47
of 218
 Instruction handbook b maXX BM3000, BM3200, BM3300
Document no. 5.11018.11 
4DESIGN AND FUNCTION
In this chapter the basic design of the device BM3000, BM3200, BM3300 is described 
and the type code on the devices is described.
NOTE!
The devices of the BM3000, BM3200, BM3300-series are intended for the use in the 
„Second environment“ (industrial environment) compliant with EN 61800-3. EMC-in-
terferences can appear, if it is connected to the public supply.
Also see ZAppropriate use– from page 12.
NOTE!
Components of Baumüller Nürnberg GmbH are intended to be installed into commer-
cially available control cabinets
There are a number of reasons, why the components should be operated in commer-
cially available control cabinets. Especially the following points are assured by install-
ing these components into the control cabinet:
m The protection against contact, requested by the user can be implemented.
m The stated thermal environment conditions (temperature, relative air humidity, 
cleanliness of the coolants,...), in the technical data of the components and devic-
es is assured.
m The stated mechanical environment conditions (technical data of the components 
and devices (vibration, shocks,....) is assured.
m The stated notes in the technical data for the EMC-compatible configuration and in 
order to obtain an EMC-compatible design (shielding concepts, installation princi-
ples, leadthroughs,...) can be implemented.






Design
Instruction handbook b maXX BM3000, BM3200, BM3300
Document no. 5.11018.11 Baumüller Nürnberg GmbH
48
of 218
4.1
4.1 Design
The BM3200, BM3300 device series are servo converters of Baumüller Nürnberg GmbH. 
The devices consist of a power unit and a controller unit, which are integrated in a com-
mon housing. The rated current of the devices reaches from 5 A to 10 A. The devices dif-
fer in size, power and equipment (hard- and software). Variants see ZType code– from 
page 53. Devices BM3000 are supply units.
The devices BM3000, BM3200, BM3300 are part of the Baumüller device series b maXX 
and can be interconnected with other Baumüller devices.
The device series b maXX mainly consists of 2 systems:
Module system consisting of a supply unit and of one or several axis units.
m Su
pply unit
This is a mains rectifier-/active mains rectifier unit for the supply of axis units via the DC-
link.
The AC voltage at the three-phase system is converted from the input sided mains recti-
fier unit into DC voltage. The DC-link capacitors smooth this DC-link voltage. Additionally 
the active mains rectifier unit can regenerate excess braking energy as sinusoidal current 
into the power supply.
m Axis unit (with c
ontroller)
This is a motor power inverter, which is supplied from the DC-link via a mains rectifier- or 
a active mains rectifier unit.
The output sided inverter generates a three-phase current system with a variable fre-
quency and voltage for the supply of the connected motor. 
The controller part controls the inverter of the power unit. The controller is operated either 
by an operating software or by a superordinated control. 
NOTE!
A de
vice of the series BM3000 is a mains rectifier unit.
NOTE!
A device of the series BM3200, BM3300 can be operated as an axis unit.
NOTICE!
A proper operation of the BM3200, BM3300 as an axis unit, can be guaranteed at 
Baumüller mains rectifier units. An operation on active mains rectifiers is forbid-
den.
The mains rectifier unit must be supplied by a TT- or TN-network.







Design and Function
Instruction handbook b maXX BM3000, BM3200, BM3300
Document no. 5.11018.11 
49
of 218
4
Compact servo 
unit
Supply-/axis unit and controller in one housing, these devices can be operated individu-
ally also.
The input sided inverter converts the AC current into DC current, which was taken from 
the power supply. The DC-link capacitors smooth this DC-link voltage. The output sided 
inverter generates a three-phase system with variable frequency and voltage for the sup-
ply of the connected motor.
The controller parts controls the inverter of the power unit. The controller is operated ei-
ther by operating software or by a superordinated control.
NOTE!
A device of the series BM3200, BM3300 is a compact servo unit.





Identification of the device
Instruction handbook b maXX BM3000, BM3200, BM3300
Document no. 5.11018.11 Baumüller Nürnberg GmbH
50
of 218
4.2
4.2 Identification of the device
4.2.1 Part number BM3200, BM3300
Figure 17: Part number BM3200, BM3300  - front





Design and Function
Instruction handbook b maXX BM3000, BM3200, BM3300
Document no. 5.11018.11 
51
of 218
4
4.2.2 Type plate
The figure shows the positions, where the type plate was attached.
On the type plate the type code of the device is found, also.
BM3000
Figure 18: Type plate attachment BM3000





Identification of the device
Instruction handbook b maXX BM3000, BM3200, BM3300
Document no. 5.11018.11 Baumüller Nürnberg GmbH
52
of 218
4.2
BM3200, BM3300
Figure 19: Type plate attachment BM3200, BM3300





Design and Function
Instruction handbook b maXX BM3000, BM3200, BM3300
Document no. 5.11018.11 
53
of 218
4
4.2.3 Type code
The type code has the format: 
BM3XXX-XXXX-XXXXX[-X]-XXXXX[-S0X]-XX[-XX][-EXX][-#XX].
The type code is explained in the following table.
BM3XXX-XXXX-XXXXX[-X]-XXXXX[-S0X]-XX[-XX][-EXX][-#XX] Device generation
BM3XXX-XXXX-XXXXX[-X]-XXXXX[-S0X]-XX[-XX][-EXX][-#XX] Device design
0: Mains rectifier unit
2:  Compact Servo unit
3: Compact Servo unit safety
BM3XXX-XXXX-XXXXX[-X]-XXXXX[-S0X]-XX[-XX][-EXX][-#XX] Housing size
0 to 1: see ZDimensions– from page 23.
BM3XXX-XXXX-XXXXX[-X]-XXXXX[-S0X]-XX[-XX][-EXX][-#XX] Current grading (output rated current)
see ZElectrical data– from page 35
BM3XXX-XXXX-XXXXX[-X]-XXXXX[-S0X]-XX[-XX][-EXX][-#XX] Type of cooling
S:  Air-cooled with air supply and air exhaust 
in the control cabinet
C: Cold plate
BM3XXX-XXXX-XXXXX[-X]-XXXXX[-S0X]-XX[-XX][-EXX][-#XX] Type of power supply
T:  Grounded TN or TT power supply network
E: single phase power supply only
G:  Grounded delta systems, IT systems,
grounded TN or TT systems
BM3XXX-XXXX-XXXXX[-X]-XXXXX[-S0X]-XX[-XX][-EXX][-#XX] Type of electronic safety relay
(only BM3300)
0:  No safety relay
2: Double safety relay
BM3XXX-XXXX-XXXXX[-X]-XXXXX[-S0X]-XX[-XX][-EXX][-#XX] Design
0: Standard
BM3XXX-XXXX-XXXXX[-X]-XXXXX[-S0X]-XX[-XX][-EXX][-#XX] Hardware design basic unit
0XX:  Unit with ballast transistor, U
ZK
 = 540 V
210: Mains rectifier unit, without ballast transistor,
U
ZK
 = 540 V
BM3XXX-XXXX-XXXXX[-X]-XXXXX[-S0X]-XX[-XX][-EXX][-#XX] Special design basic unit
00: Standard
BM3XXX-XXXX-XXXXX[-X]-XXXXX[-S0X]-XX[-XX][-EXX][-#XX] Ballast resistor optional
B:  Ballast resistor integrated
E, -: Without internal ballast resistor, 
connection for external ballast resistor







Identification of the device
Instruction handbook b maXX BM3000, BM3200, BM3300
Document no. 5.11018.11 Baumüller Nürnberg GmbH
54
of 218
4.2
BM3XXX-XXXX-XXXXX[-X]-XXXXX[-S0X]-XX[-XX][-EXX][-#XX] Fieldbus interface
1: EtherCAT
® 
CoE
2: VARAN
3: CANopen
®
4: POWERLINK
®
5: ProfiNET RT/IRT
7: EtherCAT
® 
SoE
BM3XXX-XXXX-XXXXX[-X]-XXXXX[-S0X]-XX[-XX][-EXX][-#XX] Encoder interface
1:  HIPERFACE
®
, EnDat
®
 2.1, SSI, 
square and sine incremental encoder,
resolver
2: EnDat
®
 2.2
3: HIPERFACE DSL
®
BM3XXX-XXXX-XXXXX[-X]-XXXXX[-S0X]-XX[-XX][-EXX][-#XX] Digital inputs/outputs
1:  2 digital inputs/ 2 digital outputs
BM3XXX-XXXX-XXXXX[-X]-XXXXX[-S0X]-XX[-XX][-EXX][-#XX] Analog inputs/outputs
1:  1 analog input/ 2 analog outputs
signal bus for max.12 devices
2: 2 analog inputs/2 analog outputs
extended signal bus for max. 30 devices
BM3XXX-XXXX-XXXXX[-X]-XXXXX[-S0X]-XX[-XX][-EXX][-#XX] Option inputs/outputs
0: no
BM3XXX-XXXX-XXXXX[-X]-XXXXX[-S0X]-XX[-XX][-EXX][-#XX] Kind of STO function optional
(only BM3300)
S00:  Safety function STO
Note: 
Not conform to Safety Standards.
Permitted for process protection only.
S01:  Safety function STO according
Safety claim PLe / SIL3
(for replacement only)
S02:  Safety function STO according
Safety claim PLe / SIL3
with short-circuit detection
BM3XXX-XXXX-XXXXX[-X]-XXXXX[-S0X]-XX[-XX][-EXX][-#XX] Incompatible controller software version 
BM3XXX-XXXX-XXXXX[-X]-XXXXX[-S0X]-XX[-XX][-EXX][-#XX] Option compatible controller software 
version
BM3XXX-XXXX-XXXXX[-X]-XXXXX[-S0X]-XX[-XX][-EXX][-#XX] Software function option
BM3XXX-XXXX-XXXXX[-X]-XXXXX[-S0X]-XX[-XX][-EXX][-#XX] Safety level option (only BM3300)
#00:  Used for safety level STO





Design and Function
Instruction handbook b maXX BM3000, BM3200, BM3300
Document no. 5.11018.11 
55
of 218
4
4.3 UL notes
The notes below must be observed in case you consider UL 508 C.
ZRequirements to the energy supply: power supply– on page 27
ZRequired environmental conditions– on page 29
ZRequirements for the motor temperature sensors– on page 95
ZConnections– from page 120
Connections from ZPage 120– to ZPage 145–
n For use with grounded wye sources only or equivalent.
n Note the maximum surrounding air temperature.
n Use in a pollution degree 2 environment only.
n Motor over-temperature sensing is required. Drive intended to 
be used with motors that have thermal sensor mounted in or on 
the motors.
Connection see ZConnecting diagrams– from page 98
n Position of wiring terminals to indicate the proper connec-
tions for the power supply, load, control circuit, and similar 
devices refer to ZPage 120–.
n Note tightening torque values marked for field terminals.













UL notes
Instruction handbook b maXX BM3000, BM3200, BM3300
Document no. 5.11018.11 Baumüller Nürnberg GmbH
56
of 218
4.3
ZFuses– from page 191
n Devices are suitable for use on a circuit capable of deliver-
ing not more than 5000 rms symmetrical amperes,480Y/277 V
AC
 
maximum
m when protected by J Class Fuses rated min. 480  V
AC
, max. 15  A 
or
m when protected by a circuit breaker rated min. 480/277 V, 
max. 20 A.
n Integral solid state short circuit protection does not provide 
branch circuit protection. Branch circuit protection must be 
provided in accordance with the Manufacturer Instructions, 
National Electrical Code and any additional local codes.






Design and Function
Instruction handbook b maXX BM3000, BM3200, BM3300
Document no. 5.11018.11 
57
of 218
4
4.4 Display elements BM3000
The mains rectifier unit BM3000 displays its state via the LED state display H100.
Name
Internal designation
Meaning
H100 State display
H100 green: Bridging relay switched on





Display- and operating elements BM3200, BM3300
Instruction handbook b maXX BM3000, BM3200, BM3300
Document no. 5.11018.11 Baumüller Nürnberg GmbH
58
of 218
4.5
4.5 Display- and operating elements BM3200, BM3300
Depending on the variant of the fieldbus connection
EtherCAT
®
Type code BM3200, BM3300 with EtherCAT
®
 CoE profile:
BM3XXX-XXXX-XXXXX[-X]-1XXXX[-S0X]-X
X[-XX][-EXX][-#XX]
Type code BM3
200, BM3300 with EtherCAT
®
 SoE profile:
BM3XXX-XXXX-XXXXX[-X]-7XXXX[-S0X]-X
X[-XX][-EXX][-#XX]
Figure 20: Display-/Operator controls Controller BM3200, BM3300 EtherCAT
®
H1: 7-segment display
display status controller
Meaning see: ZFunction of the 7-segment display– 
from page 62
H11 - H14: Status display via LED 
Meaning see: ZFunction of the LEDs H11 to H14– on 
page 63
X1: Service interface
S1 - S4: Address switch
Setting: see 
ZSettings address switches– from page 66
H31:LED EtherCAT
®
H32:LED EtherCAT
®
H41:LED EtherCAT
®
H42:LED EtherCAT
®
Meaning: see ZLEDs EtherCAT
®
– on page 64
NOTE!
Th
e service interface X1 must be used with the service cable BM5-K-USB-XXX only, 
maximum transmission rate 920 kBaud.











Design and Function
Instruction handbook b maXX BM3000, BM3200, BM3300
Document no. 5.11018.11 
59
of 218
4
VARAN Type code BM3200, BM3300 with VARAN:
BM3XXX-XXXX-XXXXX[-X]-2XXXX
[-S0X]-XX[-XX][-EXX][-#XX]
Figure 21: Display-/Operator controls Controller BM3200, BM3300 EtherCAT
®
H1: 7-segment display
display status controller
Meaning see: ZFunction of the 7-segment display– 
from page 62
H11 - H14: Status display via LED 
Meaning see: ZFunction of the LEDs H11 to H14– on 
page 63
X1: Service interface
S1 - S4: Address switch
Setting: see 
ZSettings address switches– from page 66
H31:LED VARAN
H32:LED VARAN
H41:L
ED VARAN
H42:LED VARAN
Meaning: see ZLEDs VARAN– on page 64
NOTE!
The service i
nterface X1 must be used with the service cable BM5-K-USB-XXX only, 
maximum transmission rate 920 kBaud.











Display- and operating elements BM3200, BM3300
Instruction handbook b maXX BM3000, BM3200, BM3300
Document no. 5.11018.11 Baumüller Nürnberg GmbH
60
of 218
4.5
CANopen
®
Type code BM3200, BM3300 with CANopen
®
:
BM3XXX-XXXX-XXXXX[-X]-3XXXX[-S0X]-X
X[-XX][-EXX][-#XX]
Figure 22: Display-/Operator controls Controller BM3200, BM3300 CANopen
®
H1: 7-segment display
display status controller
Meaning see: ZFunction of the 7-segment display– 
from page 62
H11 - H14: Status display via LED 
Meaning see: ZFunction of the LEDs H11 to H14– on 
page 63
X1: Service interface
S1  Reserved for further functions
S2  Baud rate CANopen
®
See address switch ZCANopen
®
– from page 69.
S3/S4: Address CANopen
®
See address switch ZCANopen
®
– from page 69.
H31/H32: LEDs without function
H41/42:
LEDs without function
NOTE!
The service interface X1 must be used with the service cable BM5-K-USB-XXX only, 
maximum transmission rate 920 kBaud.











Design and Function
Instruction handbook b maXX BM3000, BM3200, BM3300
Document no. 5.11018.11 
61
of 218
4
POWERLINK
®
Type code BM3200, BM3300 with POWERLINK
®
 
BM3XXX-XXXX-XXXXX[-X]-4XXXX
[-S0X]-XX[-XX][-EXX][-#XX]
Figure 23: Display-/Operator controls Controller BM3200, BM3300 POWERLINK
®
H1: 7-segment display
display status controller
Meaning see: ZFunction of the 7-segment display– 
from page 62
H11 - H14: Status display via LED 
Meaning see: ZFunction of the LEDs H11 to H14– on 
page 63
X1: Service interface
S1 - S4: Address switch
Setting: see 
ZSettings address switches– from page 66
H31: LED POWERLINK
®
H32: LED POWERLINK
®
H41: LED POWERLINK
®
H42: LED POWERLINK
®
Meaning: see ZLEDs POWERLINK
®
– on page 65
NOTE!
The service i
nterface X1 must be used with the service cable BM5-K-USB-XXX only, 
maximum transmission rate 920 kBaud.











Display- and operating elements BM3200, BM3300
Instruction handbook b maXX BM3000, BM3200, BM3300
Document no. 5.11018.11 Baumüller Nürnberg GmbH
62
of 218
4.5
4.5.1 Function of the 7-segment display
Display
0
NOT READY-TO-START Drive signals „not ready for power switch-on“
1
INHIBIT START Voltage inhibited, e.g. quickstop active
2
READY-TO-START Drive shut down
Control word: xxxx x110
Pulse enable = 0
Quick stop= 1 (low-active)
3
SWITCHED ON Control word: xxxx x111
Pulse enable = 1
Quick stop = 1
4
OPERATION ENABLED Control word: xxxx 1111
Pulse enable = 1
Quick stop = 1
5
INHIBIT OPERATION ACTIVE
6
DRIVE SHUT DOWN ACTIVE Pulse enable = 0
7
QUICK STOP ACTIVE Quick stop = 0 (low-active)
E
ERROR REACTION ACTIVE
F
ERROR Error message
Reset via control word 0xxx xxxx
and accordingly delete error memory 0 
➝ 1
P
Parking axis
An exact description is found in the drive sta
tuses- and accordingly the transitions in the 
Parameter Manual.
0: Low, 1: High
Condition 
Drive Manager
Meaning





Design and Function
Instruction handbook b maXX BM3000, BM3200, BM3300
Document no. 5.11018.11 
63
of 218
4
4.5.2 Function of the LEDs H11 to H14
H11 1.1 green
1.1 red
Torque direction
H11 green: positive torque direction
H11 red: negative torque direction
H12 1.2 green
1.2 red
Power-On / pulse enable 24 V connected
H12 green: power ON
H12 red: 
H13 1.3 red Current limit
H13 red: device is operating at current limit
H14 1.4 red Error display
H14 red: device signal error
Designation 
f
ront plate
Internal designation Meaning





Display- and operating elements BM3200, BM3300
Instruction handbook b maXX BM3000, BM3200, BM3300
Document no. 5.11018.11 Baumüller Nürnberg GmbH
64
of 218
4.5
4.5.3 Function of the LEDs H31/H32 and H41/H42
Depending on the variant of the fieldbus connection
LEDs EtherCAT
®
Type code BM3200, BM3300 with EtherCAT
®
 CoE profile:
BM3XXX-XXXX-XXXXX[-X]-1XXXX[-S0X]-X
X[-XX][-EXX][-#XX]
Type code BM3
200, BM3300 with EtherCAT
®
 SoE profile:
BM3XXX-XXXX-XXXXX[-X]-7XXXX[-S0X]-X
X[-XX][-EXX][-#XX]
LEDs VARAN Type code BM3200, BM3300 with VARAN:
BM3XXX-XXXX-XXXXX[-X]-2XXXX[-S0X]-X
X[-XX][-EXX][-#XX]
Naming on the 
front plate
H31 (green)
H41 (green)
LINK On: connection between 2 PHYs 
(physical interfaces) is established
H32 (yellow)
H42 (yellow)
ACTIVE On: data is received or transmitted
Designation 
f
ront plate
Meaning Blinking pattern
H31 (green) X3 Link / Act off: no connection
on: connection
blinking: data transmission
H32 (orange) ERROR on: ERROR 
(recipient error Phy1/Phy2)
H41 (green)  X4 Link / Act off: no connection
on: connection
blinking: data transmission
H42 (orange) RUN off: ERROR/INIT
500 ms on/ 
500 ms off: PREOPERATIONAL
200 ms on/
1 s off: SAFEOPERATIONAL
on: OPERATIONAL
Meaning Blinking pattern





Design and Function
Instruction handbook b maXX BM3000, BM3200, BM3300
Document no. 5.11018.11 
65
of 218
4
LEDs CANopen
®
Type code BM3200, BM3300 with CANopen
®
:
BM3XXX-XXXX-XXXXX[-X]-3XXXX
[-S0X]-XX[-XX][-EXX][-#XX]
LEDs without function.
LEDs 
POWERLINK
®
Type code BM3200, BM3300 with POWERLINK
®
 
BM3XXX-XXXX-XXXXX[-X]-4XXXX
[-S0X]-XX[-XX][-EXX][-#XX]
Naming on the 
front plate
H31 (green) X3 Link / Act Off: No connection
On: Connection
Blinking: Data transfer
H32 (yellow) ERROR Off: NMT_CT3, NMT_CT7, NMT_GT2
On: NMT_CT11, NMT_GT6
Blinking: Configuration error 
(e.g. address setting)
H41 (green)  X4 Link / Act Off: No connection
On: Connection
Blinking: Data transfer
H42 (green) STATUS Off: NMT_GS_OFF, NMT_GS_INITIALISATION,
NMT_CS_NOT_ACTIVE
50 ms off /
50 ms on:  NMT_CS_BASIC_ETHERNET
200 ms on /
1 s off:  NMT_CS_PRE_OPERATIONAL_1
2 x 200 ms on /
1 s off:  NMT_CS_PRE_OPERATIONAL_2
3 x 200 ms on /
1 s off:  NMT_CS_READY_TO_OPERATE
On: NMT_CS_OPERATIONAL
200 ms on /
200 ms off:  NMT_CS_STOPPED
Meaning Blinking pattern





Display- and operating elements BM3200, BM3300
Instruction handbook b maXX BM3000, BM3200, BM3300
Document no. 5.11018.11 Baumüller Nürnberg GmbH
66
of 218
4.5
4.5.4 Settings address switches
EtherCAT
®
 CoE
EtherCAT
®
 SoE
BM3XXX-XXXX-XXXXX[-X]-1XXXX[-S0X]-XX[-XX][-EXX][-#XX]
BM3XXX-XXXX-XXXXX[-X]-7XXXX[-S0X]-XX[-XX][-EXX][-#XX]
VARAN BM3XXX-XXXX-XXXXX[-X]-2XXXX[-S0X]-XX[-XX][-EXX][-#XX]
POWERLINK
®
BM3XXX-XXXX-XXXXX[-X]-4XXXX[-S0X]-XX[-XX][-EXX][-#XX]
IP-Address 
S1 to S4
The IP address of the controller consists of 32 bits or 4 bytes (e.g. 192.168.125.203). 
Controller with EtherCAT
® 
or VARAN profile: Both of the first bytes are set with the base 
address (192.168.) at the factory. Both of the last bytes are set by means of the address 
switches S1, S2, S3 and S4. In the process, S1 and S2 as well as S3 and S4 each rep-
resent an 8 bit value. 
Controller with POWERLINK
®
-profile: Both of the first bytes are set with the base address 
(192.168.100) at the factory. Both of the last bytes are set by means of the address 
switches S3 and S4. In the process, S3 and S4 each represent an 8 bit value. 
The IP address 192.168.0.0 or 192.168.100.0 is not permitted/reserved.
For information on changing the base address, see the parameter manual.
EtherCAT
® 
or VARAN profile:
POWERLINK
®
 profile
Switch setting up
Switch setting down
Switch setting up
Switch setting down






Design and Function
Instruction handbook b maXX BM3000, BM3200, BM3300
Document no. 5.11018.11 
67
of 218
4





Display- and operating elements BM3200, BM3300
Instruction handbook b maXX BM3000, BM3200, BM3300
Document no. 5.11018.11 Baumüller Nürnberg GmbH
68
of 218
4.5
Figure 24: Address switch setting EtherCAT
®
, POWERLINK
®
, VARAN





Design and Function
Instruction handbook b maXX BM3000, BM3200, BM3300
Document no. 5.11018.11 
69
of 218
4
CANopen
®
BM3XXX-XXXX-XXXXX[-X]-3XXXX[-S0X]-XX[-XX][-EXX][-#XX]
Baud rate S2
20 kBit/s
switch

125 kBit/s, default setting
250 kBit/s 500 kBit/s
1 MBit/s
NOTE!
Switch up
= 0001






Display- and operating elements BM3200, BM3300
Instruction handbook b maXX BM3000, BM3200, BM3300
Document no. 5.11018.11 Baumüller Nürnberg GmbH
70
of 218
4.5
Address S3/S4
Figure 25: Address setting CANopen
® 





71
of 218
 Instruction handbook b maXX BM3000, BM3200, BM3300
Document no. 5.11018.11 
5TRANSPORT AND PACKAGING 
5.1 Safety notes for transport
5.2 What to observe when transporting
For initial transport of a device, it is packed at the manufacturer's plant. If the device must 
be transported, ensure that the following conditions are met throughout the entire trans-
port:
m Climate class 2 K 3 as per EN 60721-3-2
m Temperature range - 25 °C up to + 70 °C
m Vibration, shock, continuous shock class 2 M 1 as per EN 60721-3-2
NOTICE!
Damage due to unauthorized transport!
Transport handled by untrained personnel can lead to a substantial amount of mate-
rial damage.
m The unloading of the packages upon delivery as well as the in-house transport 
should only be done by trained personnel.
m Contact Baumüller Nürnberg GmbH sales office if necessary.
WARNING!
Danger of physical impact!
Secure devices against falling down.
Therefore:
m Take suitable measures, such as supports, hoists, straps, etc., to ensure that de-
vice cannot fall down.
m Use appropriate means of transport.





Transport inspection
Instruction handbook b maXX BM3000, BM3200, BM3300
Document no. 5.11018.11 Baumüller Nürnberg GmbH
72
of 218
5.3
5.3 Transport inspection
Upon receiving the delivered goods, immediately examine them for completeness and 
transport damage.
If there is visible transport damage on the outside, proceed as follows:
m Do not accept the delivery or conditi
onally accept it with reservations.
m Note the extent of the damage on the transport do
cuments or on the delivery note of 
the shipping agent.
m Immediately file a complaint with the freight 
carrier. Have the complaint confirmed in 
writing and immediately contact the responsible representative of Baumüller Nürnberg 
GmbH.
5.4 Unpacking
After having received the packaged device:
h Avoid forceful transport agitation and hard jolts, e.g. wh
en putting an item down.
If no transport damage is visible:
h Open the packaging of the device.
h Verify the delivery scope based on the delivery note.
File a claim with the responsible Baumüller representative if the delivery is incomplete.
5.5 Disposal of the packaging
The packaging consists of cardboard, plastic, metal parts, corrugated cardboard and/or 
wood.
h When disposing of the packaging, comply with the
 national regulations valid at the use 
area.
NOTE!
Th
e device may not be operated if there is visible transport damage!
NOTE!
Claim each individual deficiency as soon as it has been detected. Damage claims can 
only be validly asserted within the claim registration period.





73
of 218
 Instruction handbook b maXX BM3000, BM3200, BM3300
Document no. 5.11018.11 
6MOUNTING
The device is intended for mounting it into a control cabinet.
Mounting comprises the following steps:
1 Mounting preparation 
(for drilling holes, see ZDrilling templates– from page 77)
2 Mounting
the device (for attachment, see ZMounting instruction BM3200, BM3300– on page 83)
6.1 Safety notes
NOTE!
Mounting shall only be performed by employees of the manufacturer or by other qual-
ified personnel.
Qualified personnel are persons who – on account of their occupational training, ex-
perience, instruction and knowledge of relevant standards and stipulations, accident 
prevention regulations and operating conditions – are authorized by the persons, re-
sponsible for the safety of the facilities to perform the respective activities that are 
necessary, while at the same time recognizing and preventing any potential risks. 
The qualifications necessary for working with the device are, for example:
m Occupational training or instruction in accordance with the standards of safety en-
gineering for the care and use of appropriate safety equipment.







Safety notes
Instruction handbook b maXX BM3000, BM3200, BM3300
Document no. 5.11018.11 Baumüller Nürnberg GmbH
74
of 218
6.1
WARNING!
Danger as a result of faulty mounting!
The mounting requires qualified personnel with adequate experience. Faulty mount-
ing can lead to life-threatening situations or substantial material damage.
Therefore:
m Only allow mounting to be performed by employees of the manufacturer or by oth-
er qualified personnel.
WARNING!
Danger of physical impact!
Secure devices against falling down.
NOTICE!
Danger due to electrostatic discharge.
The connecting terminals of the device are partially at risk due from ESD.
Therefore:
Please heed the respective notes.





Mounting
Instruction handbook b maXX BM3000, BM3200, BM3300
Document no. 5.11018.11 
75
of 218
6
CAUTION!
Danger due to sharp edges.
If the device is lifted with unprotected hands during mounting, palms or fingers can 
be cut. If the device falls, feet can be injured.
Figure 26: Danger area near the mechanical mounting
Therefore:
m Ensure that only qualified personnel, who are familiar with the safety notes and as-
sembly instructions, mount this device.
Wear safety gloves.
Wear safety shoes.





Preparing for mounting
Instruction handbook b maXX BM3000, BM3200, BM3300
Document no. 5.11018.11 Baumüller Nürnberg GmbH
76
of 218
6.2
6.2 Preparing for mounting
Based on the project planning and the drilling templates (see ZDrilling templates– from 
page 77), the positions of the attachment drill holes can be determined.
NOTICE!
Property damage due to conductive contamination.
Therefore:
m When performing installation work of any kind, it must be ensured that no foreign 
material (e.g. drill shavings, copper strands, etc.) gets into the device as a result. 
m If possible, the drilling of the holes should be done before mounting the device and 
the configuring of the cables should take place outside of the control cabinet. If this 
is not possible, the device must be appropriately covered.
Remove this covering again prior to starting operation without fail! 
CAUTION!
Eye injury due to flung particles.
Metal particles are flung when making the drill holes and the cutout sections.
Therefore:
Wear safety goggles!







Mounting
Instruction handbook b maXX BM3000, BM3200, BM3300
Document no. 5.11018.11 
77
of 218
6
6.3 Drilling templates
How to determine the required space in the control cabinet, see ZDimensions–  from 
page 23.
Use the drilling templates to make the necessary drill holes.
Tolerance 
specifications
NOTE!
Consider the minimum clearances for cooling when making the drill holes.
Further notes see ZDimensions– from page 23 and ZCooling– from page 34.
NOTE!
m Assembly permitted in the displayed position only (vertical with air cooling from the 
bottom to the top). 
m A lining up of several devices next to each other is possible. Comply with the 
specified clearance of 100 mm above and below the device, so that the air circu-
lation for heat dissipation is guaranteed.
NOTE!
All dimensions in mm.
Drill hole dimensioning ±0.2 mm
Relative tolerance of discretionary divisions ±0.1 mm









Drilling templates
Instruction handbook b maXX BM3000, BM3200, BM3300
Document no. 5.11018.11 Baumüller Nürnberg GmbH
78
of 218
6.3
Drilling template 
BM3000






Figure 27: Drilling template BM3000





Mounting
Instruction handbook b maXX BM3000, BM3200, BM3300
Document no. 5.11018.11 
79
of 218
6
Drilling template 
BM3200, BM3300
Figure 28: Drilling template BM3200, BM3300





Mounting instruction BM3000
Instruction handbook b maXX BM3000, BM3200, BM3300
Document no. 5.11018.11 Baumüller Nürnberg GmbH
80
of 218
6.4
6.4 Mounting instruction BM3000
Mechanical data 
of the mounting 
plate for cold plate
Surface flatness
(across the entire surface)
0.05 mm
Surface roughness Ra 1.2 µm
Material of the plate (recommendation) AlMgSi 0.5
m When mounting cold plate devices, ensure that the surface quality of the mounting 
plate meets the specifications and ensure that the device’s rear panel/mounting 
plate does not have any scratches or burrs.
The cooling version cold plate is a particular e
fficient cooling alternative. The heat dissi-
pation is done via 2 contact surfaces. The first one is the mounting platform within the con-
trol cabinet or on the machine base, the other is the cold plate on the device’s back. High 
requirements e.g. to surface roughness and evenness for this surface are specified, to 
ensure an optimal heat flow. Already a slight damage/pollution of the surface can cause 
a significant deterioration in heat dissipation to the mounting plate.
For this reason while handle the units protect the sensitive function surface to avoid dam-
age.
DANGER!
Risk of
 fatal injury from electrical current!
The mains rectifier BM3000 protection code is IP00.
The operator is responsible for the protection against direct and indirect touch in the 
switching cabinet.
NOTE!
The mains rectifier BM3000 is available with cold plate cooling only.
NOTICE!
Property damage due to overheating.
Scratches and burrs can inhibit the heat dissipation of cold plate devices.
Therefore





Mounting
Instruction handbook b maXX BM3000, BM3200, BM3300
Document no. 5.11018.11 
81
of 218
6
The required screws and washers for the mounting are specified below the figure.
Complete mounting as follows:
1 Provide suitable fixing material.
2 Mo
unt device.
n check the
 surface quality of device’s rear panel/mounting plate, see ZMechanical 
data of the mounting plate for cold plate– on p
age 80
Mount device h  Mount BM3000 horizontally only.
Figure 29: Mounting instruction BM3000
Device BM3000
A - Screws 2 x M5
B - Washers 2 x (5,3 x 10)







Mounting instruction BM3000
Instruction handbook b maXX BM3000, BM3200, BM3300
Document no. 5.11018.11 Baumüller Nürnberg GmbH
82
of 218
6.4
Mount protection 
cover (option)
1 Keep the accessories kit protection cover ready 
(see ZAccess
ories kit protection cover BM3000– on page 197).
2 Uns
crew 2 screws M3 with a screwdriver.,
3 Re
place with 2 distance bushings M3x52 (torque 1 Nm)
4 Attach pr
otection cover
5 Mo
unt the protection cover with the 2 screws M3 (torque 1 Nm)
Distance
bushing

Figure 30: Mount protection cover (option)






Mounting
Instruction handbook b maXX BM3000, BM3200, BM3300
Document no. 5.11018.11 
83
of 218
6
6.5 Mounting instruction BM3200, BM3300
The required screws and washers for the mounting are specified below the figure.
Complete mounting as follows:
1 Pro
vide suitable fixing material.
2 Mo
unt device.
Mount device h  O
n the top and on the bottom insert the fixing screw into the longitudinal holes (1). 
h Th
en let the device glide downwards (2). 
h In co
nclusion, tighten all fixing screws and grounding screws (3).
Figure 31: Mounting instruction BM3200, BM3300
Device BM3200, BM3300
A - Screws 2 x M5
B - Washers 2 x (5,3 x 10)





Mounting instruction BM3200, BM3300
Instruction handbook b maXX BM3000, BM3200, BM3300
Document no. 5.11018.11 Baumüller Nürnberg GmbH
84
of 218
6.5





85
of 218
 Instruction handbook b maXX BM3000, BM3200, BM3300
Document no. 5.11018.11 
7INSTALLATION 
This chapter describes the electrical installation of the device. The mechanical mounting 
is described in ZMounting– from page 73. 
Assure, that the technical preconditions are fulfilled, before installation:
Prior to installation, ensure that the technical prerequisites have been fulfilled:
1 Check the demands on the electrical power supply.
2 Check the requirements for the electrical cables and the provision of corresponding ca-
bles.
3 Check the properties of the connections and the specified configuration of the respec-
tive cables.
7.1 Safety notes
NOTE!
Installation shall only be performed by employees of the manufacturer or by other 
qualified personnel.
Qualified personnel are persons who – on account of their occupational training, ex-
perience, instruction and knowledge of relevant standards and stipulations, accident 
prevention regulations and operating conditions – are authorized by the persons re-
sponsible for the safety of the facilities to perform the respective activities that are 
necessary, while at the same time recognizing and preventing any potential risks. 
The qualifications necessary for working with the device are, for example:
m Occupational training or instruction, and the authorization to commission, ground 
and mark electrical power circuits and devices in accordance with the standards of 
the safety engineering.
m Occupational training or instruction, in accordance with the standards of work safe-
ty, for the care and use of appropriate safety equipment.






Safety notes
Instruction handbook b maXX BM3000, BM3200, BM3300
Document no. 5.11018.11 Baumüller Nürnberg GmbH
86
of 218
7.1
WARNING!
Danger due to faulty installation and initial commissioning!
Installation and initial commissioning require qualified personnel with adequate expe-
rience. Faulty installation can lead to life-threatening situations or substantial material 
damage.
Therefore:
m Only allow installation and initial commissioning to be performed by employees of 
the manufacturer or by other qualified personnel.
DANGER!
Risk of fatal injury from electrical current!
Inevitably, when operating this electrical device, certain parts of it are energized with 
hazardous voltage.
Therefore:
m Pay heed to areas on the device that could be dangerous during the electrical in-
stallation.
m Pay heed to areas on the device that could still be electrically energized after op-
eration.
Figure 32: Hazard areas during electrical installation
3300_0009 .cdr_rev01_int






Installation
Instruction handbook b maXX BM3000, BM3200, BM3300
Document no. 5.11018.11 
87
of 218
7
Danger from 
residual energy
7.2 Voltage test
DANGER!
Risk of fatal injury from electrical current!
Stored electric charge.
Discharge time of the complete system = discharge time of the device with the lon-
gest DC link discharge time in the complete system.
Refer to Z Electrical Data –.
Therefore:
m Do not touch electrically live parts before taking into account the discharge time of 
the capacitors.
m Heed corresponding notes on the equipment.
m If additional capacitors are connected to the DC link, the DC link discharge can 
take a much longer time. In this case, the necessary waiting period must itself be 
determined or a measurement made as to whether the equipment is de-energized. 
This discharge time must be posted, together with an IEC 60417-5036 (2002-10) 
warning symbol, on a clearly visible location of the control cabinet.
DANGER!
Risk of fatal injury from electrical current!
During the routine test of these devices, a voltage test is performed by Baumüller 
Nürnberg GmbH in accordance with EN 61800-5-1, section 5.2.3.2. Thus it is unnec-
essary for the customer to do this.
Therefore:
m Subsequent tests of the devices using high voltages may only be performed by 
Baumüller Nürnberg GmbH.
m Disconnect the converter from the system during high-voltage testing!





Demands on the electrical power supply
Instruction handbook b maXX BM3000, BM3200, BM3300
Document no. 5.11018.11 Baumüller Nürnberg GmbH
88
of 218
7.3
7.3 Demands on the electrical power supply
For all important data, see ZRequirements to the energy supply: power supply– from 
page 27.
Minor deviations from requirements in the power supply can lead to malfunctioning of the 
device. If the power supply deviates too much from the requirements, the device can be 
destroyed. 
The devices may only be operated in secondary surroundings (e.g. an industrial environ-
ment).
The destruction of the device can cause personal injury.
7.4 Requirements for the connection cables
h Take into account IEC/EN 60204-1, Chapter 13 when selecting the cable. 
h The protective ground cross-section of the cable must be compliant with IEC/
EN
 60204-1, section 5.2, tab. 1.
h A fixed connection for the protective ground conductor is mandatorily specified for op-
eration of the device.
h Use copper cable approved for a minimum of 60 °C (drives < 3 x 100 A) or 75 °C 
(drives  3 x 100
 A), if UL 508C is in consideration.
For further details (e.g. maximum permissible length), see ZCables– from page 177.
7.5 Protection of the device and accordingly of the cable
In order to protect this device and accordingly the cables against overload and possible 
damages / destruction due to the power supply, cable protection fuses and device pro-
tection fuses must be installed. Data of the required fuses see ZFuses– from page 191.
DANGER!
Risk of fatal injury from electrical current!
If the requirements for the power supply are not complied, the device can be dam-
aged or destroyed, thereby greatly endangering individuals.
Therefore:
m Prior to installation, ensure that the prerequisites for power supply have been ful-
filled.









Installation
Instruction handbook b maXX BM3000, BM3200, BM3300
Document no. 5.11018.11 
89
of 218
7
7.6 PE connection and RCD compatibility
Depending on the functional principle, leakage current >3.5 mA
AC
 or >10 mA
DC
 can flow 
through the protective conductor. Consequently, a PE connection in accordance with EN 
61800-5-1 is specified. 
7.7 Installation requirements with regard to EMC stability
DANGER!
Risk of fatal injury from electrical current!
This product can cause direct and/or alternating current in the protective ground con-
ductor.
The leakage current, due to the functional principle of the device, can lead to prema-
ture triggering of the fault current protective device or generally prevent triggering of 
it.
Therefore:
m Wherever a differential current device (RCD) is used for protection in case of direct 
or indirect contact, only an RCD of the type B is permissible to provide current to 
this product. 
m Otherwise a different protective measure must be utilized, such as separation from 
the surroundings by means of double or enhanced isolation, or separation from the 
power supply network by means of an isolating transformer, for example.
NOTE!
The emission of radio frequency interference (RFI) is to a great extent dependent on 
the wiring, spatial expansiveness and the arrangement of the components in the sys-
tem. Ensuring electromagnetic compatibility compliance in accordance with legal re-
quirements is therefore only possible on the completely assembled system and is 
thus the responsibility of the system manufacturer or proprietor (re Art. 6, Par. 9 of 
the EMVG; European EMC law).
NOTE!
The important information on EMC-compliant installation can be found in this Instruc-
tion handbook. Additional notes on building a CE-compliant system, that are impera-
tive to take heed of, can be found in the Baumüller Instruction handbook „Filters for 
mains applications“, 5.09010. This manual can be obtained from Baumüller 
Nürnberg GmbH.





Shielding plan
Instruction handbook b maXX BM3000, BM3200, BM3300
Document no. 5.11018.11 Baumüller Nürnberg GmbH
90
of 218
7.8
In order to achieve an EMC-compatible and interference-free operation within the frame-
work of legislation, the following aspects must be considered.
Please do not hesitate to contact our sales department or the application department of 
Baumüller Nürnberg GmbH, if there are any questions.
m Only use Baumüller motor cables and Baumüller components.
m Use suitab
le mains filters recommended by Baumüller Nürnberg GmbH.
m M
ount all components on a single mounting plate with a continuously good electrically-
conductive surface (e.g. galvanized steel plate).
m Ke
ep the ground connection device/ground plate as short as possible (< 30 cm), using 
fine-stranded cables with a large cross section 
(refer to ZPE 
connections BM3200, BM3300 rear panel– on page 145).
m En
sure the correct sequence at installation:
Power supply - fuse - filter - BM32
00, BM3300 - (motor filter) - motor.
m Ensure that the motor cable is continuous, without interruption.
Do not interrupt motor cables with terminals, co
ntactors or fuses, for example.
m If possible
 route the cables on the surface of the grounded mounting plate 
(i. e. the least effective antenna height).
m Wh
en routing in parallel, minimum clearance of 20 cm should be observed between 
signal and control cables vis-à-vis the power cables.
m Ca
bles of different EMC categories (e.g. signal cables - mains cables and/or motor ca-
bles) should be crossed at a 90 ° angle.
m Contact the 
major cable shield when laying cables through walls, which separate dif-
ferent EMC areas.
m Co
ntact all the cable’s shields on both sides surface-to-surface and also well-conduc-
tive with ground.
7.8 Shielding plan
The shielding of the motor cable as well as of the motor temperature cable must be con-
nected electrically with the mounting plate or with shield sheet (see ZAccessories kit 
shielding BM3200, BM3300– on page 197).
HINWEIS!
A 
ferrite core (part No. 308293) must be used with a DC link connection longer than 
3 m to ensure a reliable EMC interference immunity of the BM3200, BM3300. The 
DC link cables connected with 1C1 and 1D1 must be led through the ferrite core with 
3 turns per cable. The ferrite core should be close to the connection X205 of the 
BM3200, BM3300.
NOTE!
Baumüller Nürnberg GmbH recommends the shielding connection with shield sheet.








Installation
Instruction handbook b maXX BM3000, BM3200, BM3300
Document no. 5.11018.11 
91
of 218
7
7.8.1 Shielding connection mounting plate
Establish a large-area contact between the shield and the conductive and grounded 
mounting plate by means of a conductive clamp.
Refer to ZConnecting the shield– on page 92.
7.8.2 Shielding connection with shield sheet
7.8.2.1 Mounting shield sheet
Refer to ZAccessories kit shielding BM3200, BM3300– from page 197.
Figure 33: Mounting shield sheet
NOTE!
Pay attention to strain relief for all cables!







Shielding plan
Instruction handbook b maXX BM3000, BM3200, BM3300
Document no. 5.11018.11 Baumüller Nürnberg GmbH
92
of 218
7.8
7.8.2.2 Connecting the shield
It is recommended to connect the shielding according following figure, see also ZAcces-
sories kit shielding BM3200, BM3300– on page 197.
1 pr
epare motor cable according figure
2 rem
ove the motor temperature cable’s shield from the cable
3 wra
p motor temperature cable around motor cable at least 1 turn, form no loop.
RIGHT
WRONG
Shield 
motor cable
Motor cable
Motor temperature
cable
Shield
motor temperature
cable
Figure 34: Wrap shield motor temperature cable around motor cable







Installation
Instruction handbook b maXX BM3000, BM3200, BM3300
Document no. 5.11018.11 
93
of 218
7
4 from top wrap conductive metallic adhesive tape around 
Motor cable
Motor temperature cable
conductive metallic adhesive 
tape
Figure 35: Tape shield motor temperature cable around
NOTE!
The shielding of the motor temperature cable and the shielding of the motor cable is 
wrapped together with a conductive metallic adhesive tape.





Shielding plan
Instruction handbook b maXX BM3000, BM3200, BM3300
Document no. 5.11018.11 Baumüller Nürnberg GmbH
94
of 218
7.8
5 connect both shielding with shield clamp on the shield sheet,
note locking torque of the fixing screw!
Shield sheet
Fixing 
screw
Shielding 
clamp
Motor cable
Figure 36: Shield connection motor cable
Motor tempera-
ture cable
Wrapping with 
met
allic adhe-
sive tape
Locking torque of the fixing screw:
NOTE!
The 
shield must be connected to the mounting plate with a metallic clamp, if the op-
tional shield sheet is not used!
Shielding clamp width Locking torque
shielding clamp width 24 mm width 0.8 Nm
cable diameter 5 - 20 mm
shielding clamp width 17 mm width 0.8 Nm
cable diameter 3 - 14 mm





Installation
Instruction handbook b maXX BM3000, BM3200, BM3300
Document no. 5.11018.11 
95
of 218
7
7.9 Requirements for the motor temperature sensors
Type Additional requirements Isolation
KTY84/PT1000 - SELV/PELV
 MSKL 
1)
 (PTC) R = 1 k at T
Protection
, I
max 
< 2 mA SELV/PELV
To protect the motor against impermissible over
heating, a motor temperature sensor can 
be connected to the BM3200, BM3300 device via the encoder cable or directly. The de-
vice switches off of the motor when a settable threshold temperature has been exceeded.
1) 
Motor protection thermistor (PTC) as per DIN 44080-082
NOTE!
The motor temperature sensor must be connected either on the BM3200, BM3300
directly or via the encoder cable, the other input must not be connected.
NOTE!
The motor temperature sensor should be installed in such a manner that „safe elec-
trical separation“ is ensured. The motor temperature sensors integrated into 
Baumüller motors meet these requirements. If third-party motors are connected, the 
proprietor must ensure that the temperature sensors used in the motor of a third-party 
manufacturer motor comply with the „safe electrical separation“ function.





Installation procedure BM3000
Instruction handbook b maXX BM3000, BM3200, BM3300
Document no. 5.11018.11 Baumüller Nürnberg GmbH
96
of 218
7.10
7.10 Installation procedure BM3000
h All cables must be installed EMC-compatible. 
h Connect cable (see ZConnecting diagrams– from page 98).
(Observe the allowable torque!)
The installation consists of the following steps:
1 Connect fuses (F1), also see ZFuses– from page 191.
2 Connect BM3000 via the power supply input terminals 
three-phase: 1U1, 1V1 and 1W1
Connection data see ZConnections BM3000– on page 119.
3 Connect the protection conductor to the PE connection (a permanent PE connection 
is compulsory), also see 
ZConnections BM3000– on page 119.
4 Connect input signal for bridging relay X100 (see ZConnections BM3000– on page 
119) 
5 Connect further axis units via the DC link connection.
DANGER!
Risk of fatal injury from electrical current!
Parts under voltage are dangerous to life.
Therefore:
m Assure, that the device and the parts (e. g. power cables), which are mounted as 
well as the mounting range are de-energized during mounting.











Installation
Instruction handbook b maXX BM3000, BM3200, BM3300
Document no. 5.11018.11 
97
of 218
7
7.11 Installation procedure BM3200, BM3300
h All cables must be installed EMC-compatible. 
h Connect cable (see ZConnecting diagrams– from page 98).
(Observe the allowable torque!)
The installation consists of the following steps:
1 Connect motor to the terminals 1U2, 1V2, 1W2, PE.
Consider the appropriate phase connection (rotational direction)
Consider the allowable torques!
Connection data see ZX107 - motor connection– on page 144.
2 Connect fuses (F1), also see ZFuses– from page 191
3 Connect device via the power supply input terminals 
BM32XX-XT, BM33XX-XT
three-phase: 1U1, 1V1 and 1W1
at reduced power also single-phase possible: 1U1 and 1W1
BM32XX-XE, BM33XX-XE
single-phase: L and N
Connection data see ZX202, X203, X205 - power supply, DC link, ballast resistor 
connection– on page 138.
4 Connect the protection conductor to the PE connection (a permanent PE connection 
is compulsory), 

also see ZPE connections BM3200, BM3300 rear panel– on page 145.
5 Connect 24 V-supply via terminals X200 -1, X200 -2
Connection data see ZX200 - 24V voltage supply– on page 137.
6 Connect signal bus X300 (see ZX300 - signal bus– from page 140) 
7 Connect encoder
(encoder types and pin assignment see ZX7 - encoder connection– from page 127)
DANGER!
Risk of fatal injury from electrical current!
Parts under voltage are dangerous to life.
Therefore:
m Assure, that the device and the parts (e. g. power cables), which are mounted as 
well as the mounting range are de-energized during mounting.
NOTE!
The plugging and pulling of the energized encoder cable is not permitted and can 
cause a destruction.
Therefore, the 24V-supply voltage must be switched off before and the connector 
must be interlocked.














Connecting diagrams
Instruction handbook b maXX BM3000, BM3200, BM3300
Document no. 5.11018.11 Baumüller Nürnberg GmbH
98
of 218
7.12
8 Connection temperature sensor of motor (consider polarity!)
m with en
coder cable
m w
ith plug ZX101 - motor temperature– on page 143
9 Connect signal generator for pulse enable:
via terminals X2 -5 (IF1), X2 -1 (M24V), 
see ZX2 
- Digital inputs/outputs– on page 121.
10 Only when 
using devices without internal ballast resistor BM3XXX-XXXX-XXXXX-E-
XXXXX and dependent on the application connect a ballast resistor (R
B
) to the termi-
nals 1C1 and Ba-, also see ZElectr
ical data– from page 35.
7.12 Connecting diagrams
The connecting diagram for the power supply, the motor, the pulse enable a. s. o. are 
shown from ZPage 100– onwards.
The connection data and the pin assignments are found from ZPage 120– onwards.
NOTE!
T
he motor temperature sensor must be connected either on the BM3200, BM3300
directly or via the encoder cable, the other input must not be connected.
NOTE!
The ballast resistor connection is not short-circuit proof.
When using devices BM3200, BM3300 without internal ballast resistor an external 
ballast resistor must be connected in case of braking operation.
NOTE!
In order to ensure an adequate current carrying capacity of the connections, comply 
to the torques!
NOTE!
The identifiers 1C1 and 1D1 were taken over from DIN EN 60445. 1C1 is the connec-
tion to the positive DC link cable/rail, and in the past was identified by Baumüller in 
some devices as ZK+. 1D1 is the connection to the negative DC link cable/rail, and 
in the past was identified by Baumüller in some devices as ZK-.










Installation
Instruction handbook b maXX BM3000, BM3200, BM3300
Document no. 5.11018.11 
99
of 218
7
7.12.1 Mains rectifier BM3000
PE
K1
U
V
W
1U1
1V1
1W1
1C1
1D1
PE
1D1 1C1
M 24 V
Bridging relay
X100:3Input X100:1

Figure 37: Connection diagram BM3000
X100 Connection for input signal of bridging relay, see ZConnections BM3000– on page 119.
1U1, 1V1, 
1W1
Power supply, 
see ZRe
quirements to the energy supply: power supply– from page 27 and
ZCo
nnections BM3000– on page 119.
PE PE-connection,
see ZPE
 connection and RCD compatibility– from page 89 and
ZCo
nnections BM3000– on page 119
F1 Fuses (cable + device)
see ZProte
ction of the device and accordingly of the cable– from page 88
K1 Mains contactor (option)











Connecting diagrams
Instruction handbook b maXX BM3000, BM3200, BM3300
Document no. 5.11018.11 Baumüller Nürnberg GmbH
100
of 218
7.12
7.12.2 BM3XXX-XT as a compact servo unit (3-phase)
3300_0020_rev01_int.cdr
+24V
K1
F1
M24V
X2:1
X2:5
X2:10
X200-1
UVW
PE
F2
-2
X7
X1
X2
1C1 1D1 1U11V1 1W1
X200
X205
X202
BM3X0X
310045678
00500141
Entladezeit 15 Minuten
Discharge time 15 minutes
Betriebsanleitung beachten
Observe the user manual
ProDrive
BM5-K-USB-XXX
X300
X2:5
3
M
1W2
1V2
1U2
PE
X107
26
X102
1U2
1V2 1W2
ENC
Motor
temp.
L (off)
H (on)

Devices with internal ballast resistor BM3XXX-XTXX-XXXXX-B-XXXXX-
Figure 38: Terminal diagram BM3XXX-XT (3-phase connection, internal ballast resistor)





Installation
Instruction handbook b maXX BM3000, BM3200, BM3300
Document no. 5.11018.11 
101
of 218
7
Devices without internal ballast resistor BM3XXX-XTXX-XXXXX-E-XXXXX-
Figure 39: Terminal diagram BM3XXX-XT (3-phase connection, no internal ballast resistor)





Connecting diagrams
Instruction handbook b maXX BM3000, BM3200, BM3300
Document no. 5.11018.11 Baumüller Nürnberg GmbH
102
of 218
7.12
X1 Service interface, see ZX1 - Service interface– on page 120
X2 Digital in- and outputs, e.g. pulse enable, 
see ZX2 - Digital inputs/outputs– on page 121
X2:5 Input pulse enable, Low: not enabled, High: enabled (operation possible)
X3, X4 Connections for fieldbus EtherCAT
®
, VARAN, CANopen
®
, POWERLINK
®
, according to 
the version also see ZX3 / X4 - fieldbus connection– on page 122
X6  Analog in- and outputs, 
see ZX6 - analog inputs/outputs– on page 126
X7 Encoder analysis, 
see ZX7 - encoder connection– from page 127
X101 Connection motor temperature
see ZX101 - motor temperature– on page 143
X102 Connection STO
see ZX102 - safe torque off - option– on page 143
X107 Motor, also see ZRequirements to the motor– on page 28 and 
ZX107 - motor connection– on page 144
X200 Connections for the 24 V-voltage supply (SELV/PELV), 
see ZRequirements to the control voltage / 24 V-supply– on page 28 and ZX200 - 24V 
voltage supply– on page 137
X202 Power supply, 
see ZRequirements to the energy supply: power supply– from page 27 and
ZX202, X203, X205 - power supply, DC link, ballast resistor connection– on page 138
X203 Power supply and ballast resistor connection, 
see ZRequirements to the energy supply: power supply– from page 27 and
ZX202, X203, X205 - power supply, DC link, ballast resistor connection– on page 138
X300 Signal bus, connection to further units
see ZX300 - signal bus– on page 140
PE PE-connection,
see ZPE connection and RCD compatibility– from page 89 and
ZPE connections BM3200, BM3300 rear panel– on page 145
F1 Fuses (cable + device)
see ZProtection of the device and accordingly of the cable
– from page 88
F2 Fuse for the 24 V-voltage supply
K1 Mains contactor (optional)

























Installation
Instruction handbook b maXX BM3000, BM3200, BM3300
Document no. 5.11018.11 
103
of 218
7
7.12.3 BM3XXX as an axis unit
Devices with internal ballast resistor BM3XXX-XTXX-XXXXX-B-XXXXX-
Figure 40: Terminal diagram BM3XXX-XT - axis unit with internal ballast resistor





Connecting diagrams
Instruction handbook b maXX BM3000, BM3200, BM3300
Document no. 5.11018.11 Baumüller Nürnberg GmbH
104
of 218
7.12
Devices without internal ballast resistor BM3XXX-XTXX-XXXXX-E-XXXXX-
Figure 41: Terminal diagram BM3XXX - axis unit, without internal ballast resistor





Installation
Instruction handbook b maXX BM3000, BM3200, BM3300
Document no. 5.11018.11 
105
of 218
7
Devices with internal ballast resistor BM3XXX-XEXX-XXXXX-B-XXXXX-
Figure 42: Terminal diagram BM3XXX-XE - axis unit with internal ballast resistor





Connecting diagrams
Instruction handbook b maXX BM3000, BM3200, BM3300
Document no. 5.11018.11 Baumüller Nürnberg GmbH
106
of 218
7.12
Devices without internal ballast resistor BM3XXX-XEXX-XXXXX-E-XXXXX-
Figure 43: Terminal diagram BM3XXX-XE - - axis unit without internal ballast resistor





Installation
Instruction handbook b maXX BM3000, BM3200, BM3300
Document no. 5.11018.11 
107
of 218
7
X1 Service interface, see ZX1 - Service interface– on page 120
X2 Digital in- and outputs e. g. pulse enable, 
see ZX2 - Digital inputs/outputs– on page 121
X2:5 Input pulse enable, Low: not enabled, High: enabled (operation possible)
X3, X4 Connections for fieldbus EtherCAT
®
, VARAN, CANopen
®
, POWERLINK
®
, according to 
version, also see ZX3 / X4 - fieldbus connection– on page 122
X6  Analog in- and outputs, 
see ZX6 - analog inputs/outputs– on page 126
X7 Encoder evaluation, 
see ZX7 - encoder connection– from page 127
X101 Connection motor temperature
see ZX101 - motor temperature– on page 143
X102 Connection STO
see ZX102 - safe torque off - option– on page 143
X107 Motor, also see ZRequirements to the motor– on page 28 and 
ZX107 - motor connection– on page 144
X200 Connections for the 24 V-voltage supply (SELV/PELV), 
see ZRequirements to the control voltage / 24 V-supply– on page 28 and ZX200 - 24V 
voltage supply– on page 137
X203 Connection for DC link, see ZX202, X203, X205 - power supply, DC link, ballast resistor 
connection– on page 138
X205 Connection for the DC-link, see ZX202, X203, X205 - power supply, DC link, ballast resis-
tor connection– on page 138
X300 Signal bus, connection to further units
see ZX300 - signal bus– on page 140
F1 Fuse DC link
F2 Fuse for the 24 V-voltage supply
PE PE connection,
see ZPE connection and RCD compatibility– from page 89 and
ZPE connections BM3200, BM3300 rear panel– on page 145
NOTE!
In order to comply with the standard, at the PE connection, per cable lug one nut M5 
must be used!
























Connecting diagrams
Instruction handbook b maXX BM3000, BM3200, BM3300
Document no. 5.11018.11 Baumüller Nürnberg GmbH
108
of 218
7.12
7.12.4 BM3XXX-XT as a compact servo unit (single-phase)
Devices with internal ballast resistor BM3XXX-XTXX-XXXXX-B-XXXXX-
Figure 44: Connection diagram BM3XXX-XT (single-phase connection, with internal ballast resistor)





3300_0021_rev01_int.cdr
+24V
K1
F1
M24V
X2:1
X2:5
X2:10
X200-1
L
PE
F2
-2
X7
X1
X2
X300
X200
BM3X0X
310045678
00500141
Entladezeit 15 Minuten
Discharge time 15 minutes
Betriebsanleitung beachten
Observe the user manual
ProDrive
BM5-K-USB-XXX
X300
N
3
M
1W2
1V2
1U2
PE
X107
26
X102
1U2
1V2 1W2
ENC
Motor
temp.
X2:5
L (off)
H (on)
Ba+
1U1
1V1
1W1
X203
Ba-
R
B

Installation
Instruction handbook b maXX BM3000, BM3200, BM3300
Document no. 5.11018.11 
109
of 218
7
Devices without internal ballast resistor BM3XXX-XTXX-XXXXX-E-XXXXX-
Figure 45: Connection diagram BM3XXX-XT (single phase connection, no internal ballast resistor)





Connecting diagrams
Instruction handbook b maXX BM3000, BM3200, BM3300
Document no. 5.11018.11 Baumüller Nürnberg GmbH
110
of 218
7.12
X1 Service interface, see ZX1 - Service interface– on page 120
X2 Digital in- and outputs, e.g. pulse enable, 
see ZX2 - Digital inputs/outputs– on page 121
X2:5 Input pulse enable, Low: not enabled, High: enabled (operation possible)
X3, X4 Connections for fieldbus EtherCAT
®
, VARAN, CANopen
®
, POWERLINK
®
, according to 
the version, also see ZX3 / X4 - fieldbus connection– on page 122
X6  Analog in- and outputs,
see ZX6 - analog inputs/outputs– on page 126
X7 Encoder evaluation, 
see ZX7 - encoder connection– from page 127
X101 Connection motor temperature
see ZX101 - motor temperature– on page 143
X102 Connection STO
see ZX102 - safe torque off - option– on page 143
X107 Motor, also see ZRequirements to the motor– on page 28 and 
ZX107 - motor connection– on page 144
X200 Connections for 24 V-voltage supply (SELV/PELV), 
see ZRequirements to the control voltage / 24 V-supply– on page 28 and ZX200 - 24V 
voltage supply– on page 137
X202 Power supply connection, 
see ZRequirements to the energy supply: power supply– from page 27 and
ZX202, X203, X205 - power supply, DC link, ballast resistor connection– on page 138
X203 Power supply and ballast resistor connection, 
see ZRequirements to the energy supply: power supply– from page 27 and
ZX202, X203, X205 - power supply, DC link, ballast resistor connection– on page 138
X300 Signal bus, connection to further units
see ZX300 - signal bus– on page 140
PE PE-connection,
see ZPE connection and RCD compatibility– from page 89 and
ZPE connections BM3200, BM3300 rear panel– on page 145
F1 Fuses (cable + device)
see ZProtection of the device and accordingly of the cable
– from page 88
F2 Fuse for the 24 V-voltage supply
K1 Mains contactor (optional)

























Installation
Instruction handbook b maXX BM3000, BM3200, BM3300
Document no. 5.11018.11 
111
of 218
7
7.12.5 BM3XXX-XE as compact servo unit (1-phase, 230 V)
Devices with internal ballast resistor BM3XXX-XEXX-XXXXX-B-XXXXX-
Figure 46: Connection diagram BM3XXX-XE (1-phase connection, 230 V, with internal ballast resistor)





Connecting diagrams
Instruction handbook b maXX BM3000, BM3200, BM3300
Document no. 5.11018.11 Baumüller Nürnberg GmbH
112
of 218
7.12
Devices without internal ballast resistor BM3XXX-XEXX-XXXXX-E-XXXXX-
Figure 47: Connection diagram BM3XXX-XE (1-phase, 230 V, without internal ballast resistor)





Installation
Instruction handbook b maXX BM3000, BM3200, BM3300
Document no. 5.11018.11 
113
of 218
7
X1 Service interface, see ZX1 - Service interface– on page 120
X2 Digital in- and outputs, e.g. pulse enable, 
see ZX2 - Digital inputs/outputs– on page 121
X2:5 Input pulse enable, Low: not enabled, High: enabled (operation possible)
X3, X4 Connections for fieldbus EtherCAT
®
, VARAN, CANopen
®
, POWERLINK
®
, according to 
the version, also see ZX3 / X4 - fieldbus connection– on page 122
X6  Analog in- and outputs,
see ZX6 - analog inputs/outputs– on page 126
X7 Encoder evaluation, 
see ZX7 - encoder connection– from page 127
X101 Connection motor temperature
see ZX101 - motor temperature– on page 143
X102 Connection STO
see ZX102 - safe torque off - option– on page 143
X107 Motor, also see ZRequirements to the motor– on page 28 and 
ZX107 - motor connection– on page 144
X200 Connections for 24 V-voltage supply (SELV/PELV), 
see ZRequirements to the control voltage / 24 V-supply– on page 28 and ZX200 - 24V 
voltage supply– on page 137
X202 Power supply connection, 
see ZRequirements to the energy supply: power supply– from page 27 and
ZX202, X203, X205 - power supply, DC link, ballast resistor connection– on page 138
X205 DC link and ballast resistor connection,
see ZX202, X203, X205 - power supply, DC link, ballast resistor connection– on page 138
X300 Signal bus, connection to further units
see ZX300 - signal bus– on page 140
PE PE-connection,
see ZPE connection and RCD compatibility– from page 89 and
ZPE connections BM3200, BM3300 rear panel– on page 145
F1 Fuses (cable + device)
see ZProtection of the device and accordingly of the cable– from page 88
F2 Fuse for the 24 V-voltage supply
K1 Mains contactor (optional)
























Connecting diagrams
Instruction handbook b maXX BM3000, BM3200, BM3300
Document no. 5.11018.11 Baumüller Nürnberg GmbH
114
of 218
7.12
7.12.6 Application: Power supply connection (3-phase) with energy compensation
+24V
M24V
X2:1
X2:5
X2:10
X200-1
F4
3300_0066_rev02_int.cdr
1C1 1D1 1U11V1 1W1
X200
X205
X202
X300
X2:1
X2:5
X2:10
X200-1
1C1 1D1 1U11V1 1W1
X200
X205
X202
X300
X2:1
X2:5
X2:10
X200-1
-2
1C1 1D1 1U11V1 1W1
X200
X205
X202
X300
F3
-2
PE
3
M3
3a
L
-2
L3
L2
L1
1U2
1V2
1W2
PE
3
M2
1U2
1V2
1W2
PE
F2
2a
L
3
M1
1U2
1V2
1W2
PE
F10 F12 F14
F11 F13 F15
F1
1a
L
ENC
Filter
ENC
Filter
ENC
Filter
L (off)
H (on)
L (off)
H (on)
L (off)
H (on)

for devices with internal ballast resistor BM3XXX-XTXX-XXXXX-B-XXXXX-
Figure 48: Application: Power supply connection with energy compensation





Installation
Instruction handbook b maXX BM3000, BM3200, BM3300
Document no. 5.11018.11 
115
of 218
7
Installation notes
Additional notes for installation
n all devices must be parametrized „supply via power supply“
n a de
struction of a single device can result in secondary damage of the two other 
devices
n a comb
ined operation on 2 phases and 3 phases is not allowed,
it is not allowed to enable a single device in case of one or several fuses have been 
trip
ped (danger is overload).
n this applic
ation is only valid for the following devices
BM3201, BM3202, BM3203, BM3204, BM3211, BM3212, BM3213,
BM3301, BM3302, BM3303, BM3304, BM3311, BM3312, BM3313

n no further devices or components (e.g. external DC link capacitors) are allowed to be 
connected to the DC link
F1, F2, F2 Fuses (cable protection+ device protection), separate fuse for every device 
F1
0-F15 Option: a destruction of the next devices can be avoided
F4 Fuse for the 24 V-voltage supply
Filter Separate filter for every device, 
(a shared filter can be possible, but its function is not guaranteed)
L
1a
, L
2a
, L
3a
,Choke, u
K
 = 2 - 4 %, separate choke for every device, the use of the same type of chokes 
is required
NOTE!
No chokes are required if the power demand of all devices together is at no time 
higher than 5 kW.
NOTICE!
Only the following devices can be combined 
BM3203, BM3204, BM3212, BM3213, BM3303, BM3304, BM3312 and BM3313
or
BM3201, BM3202, BM3211, BM3301, BM3302 and BM3311.
Other interconnections are forbidden! 





Connecting diagrams
Instruction handbook b maXX BM3000, BM3200, BM3300
Document no. 5.11018.11 Baumüller Nürnberg GmbH
116
of 218
7.12
7.12.7 Application: DC link connection of further BM3000 or of additional capacities
+24V
M24V
X2:1
X2:5
X2:10
X200-1
F4
3300_0077_rev01_int.cdr
1C1 1D1 1U1 1V1 1W1
X200
X205
X202
X300
X2:1
X2:5
X2:10
X200-1
1C1 1D1 1U1 1V1 1W1
X200
X205
X202
X300
X2:1
X2:5
X2:10
X200-1
-2
1C1 1D1 1U1 1V1 1W1
X200
X205
X202
X300
-2
PE
3
M3
-2
L1
L2
L3
1U2
1V2
1W2
PE
3
M2
1U2
1V2
1W2
PE
3
M1
1U2
1V2
1W2
PE
F11
F10
F1
ENC
ENC
ENC
Filter
L (off)
H (on)
L (off)
H (on)
L (off)
H (on)
F13
F12
F15
F14

for devices with 3-phase connection and internal ballast resistor
BM3XXX-XTXX-XXXXX-B-XXXXX-
Figure 49: Example: Further devices connected to the DC link
NOTE!
Following notes must be considered if additional devices or capacities are connected 
to the DC link.
The sum of the drawn power of all devices (incl. the supply unit) must be lower than 
5 kW.





200 250 300 350 400 450 500 550
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10

200 250 300 350 400 450 500 550
Power supply voltage
(AC, phase to phase voltage)
 
 [V]
235
470
705
940
1175
1410
1645
1880
2015
2350
Total additional capacitance connected to 
the DC link [µF]
Example:
connected to the DC link
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
No. of additional devices

Installation
Instruction handbook b maXX BM3000, BM3200, BM3300
Document no. 5.11018.11 
117
of 218
7
Installation notes
Figure 50: Max. external capacitance that can be connected dependent on the power supply voltage
F1 Fuses (cable protection+ device protection)
F10-F15 Option: a destruction of the next device can be avoided
F4 Fuse for the 24 V-voltage supply
Filter The supplying device must be connected to a filter
CAUTION!
The maximum number of devices or the maximum DC link capacitance that can be 
connected depend on the power supply voltage, see ZFigure 50– on page 117.
The required waiting time between two charging procedures depends on the external 
connected DC link capacitance, see ZFigure 51– on page 118







200 250 300 350 400 450 500 550
0
2
4
6
8
10
12

200 250 300 350 400 450 500 550
Power supply voltage
(AC, phase to phase voltage)
 
 [V]
0
Waiting time [s]
no additional capacitance
connected to the DC link
235 µF or 
1 add. device
470 µF or 
2 add. devices
705 µF or 
3 add. devices
940 µF or 
4 add. devices
1175 µF or 
5 add. devices

Connecting diagrams
Instruction handbook b maXX BM3000, BM3200, BM3300
Document no. 5.11018.11 Baumüller Nürnberg GmbH
118
of 218
7.12
Figure 51: Waiting time between two charging procedures





Installation
Instruction handbook b maXX BM3000, BM3200, BM3300
Document no. 5.11018.11 
119
of 218
7
7.13 Connections BM3000
7.13.1 X100 input bridging relay
X100
7.13.2 Power connections
1U1, 1V1, 1W1 Power supply system
1U1
1V1
1W1
1C1
1D1
PE

1C1, 1D1 DC link
PE PE-connection
Input current: 0.08 A
Le
vel: Low (0 ... 5 V); High (12 … 28 V)
1  Input bridging relay
2 not connected
3 M24V
Max. conductor cross-section Termination system
0.2 mm² to 1.5 mm² spring clamp termination
 1 
 2 
 3 

Max. conductor cross-section Termination system Tightening torque
1 mm² bis 4 mm² Cable lug for M4 min. 1.4 Nm
max. 1.8 Nm
NOTICE!
The DC link cables must be double isolated.





Connections
Instruction handbook b maXX BM3000, BM3200, BM3300
Document no. 5.11018.11 Baumüller Nürnberg GmbH
120
of 218
7.14
7.14 Connections
7.14.1 BM3200, BM3300 front side
X1: 
Service interface
X2 
Di
gital 
IOs
X3 / X4: 
Fieldbus 
EtherCAT
®
, 
VARAN
CANopen
®
, 
POWERLINK
® 
X7: 
Encoder 
co
nnection
X6:
Analog
IOs
Figure 52: Connections front side
7.14.1.1 X1 - Service interface
X1
NOTE!
Only, the service cable BM5-K-USB-XXX must 
be used with the service interface X1, also see 
ZService interface– on page 150, max. trans-
mission rate 920 kBaud.

X1: Service interface






Installation
Instruction handbook b maXX BM3000, BM3200, BM3300
Document no. 5.11018.11 
121
of 218
7
7.14.1.2 X2 - Digital inputs/outputs
X2 (SELV/PELV)
Inputs: Evaluation: Edges, programmable
Current input according to input: 2 mA digital input,
20 mA fast digital input
Transit delay input: Max. 4 ms, 10 µs at fast inputs
Level: Low (0 ... 5 V); High (12 ... 28 V)
Outputs: Output current per output: 500 mA
Electrical isolation: Optocoupler
Short-circuit proof: Current-limited
Differing from this are pin No. 6,7: NO contact, ungrounded
Loading capability per NO contact: max. 30 V, max. 100 mA
Max. conductor cross-section Termination system
1.0 mm² Connector, 
spring clamp termination
NOTE!
A relay with varistor protection circuit is required in case the customer connects a re-
lay to a digital output.
1  M24V (supply digital input/output)
2  Digital input 1 (touch probe 1)
3  Digital input 2 (touch probe 2)
4 Digital input 3
5  Digital input 4 (pulse enable)
6 Ready-to-operate
7 Ready-to-operate
8  Digital output 1
9  Digital output 2
10  +24V (supply digital input/output)
1
5
6
10






Connections
Instruction handbook b maXX BM3000, BM3200, BM3300
Document no. 5.11018.11 Baumüller Nürnberg GmbH
122
of 218
7.14
7.14.1.3 X3 / X4 - fieldbus connection
Depending on the hardware-version, see ZType code– from page 53.
EtherCAT
®
Type code BM3200, BM3300 with EtherCAT
®
 CoE profile:
BM3XXX-XXXX-XXXXX[-X]-1XXXX[-S0X]-XX[-XX][-EXX][-#XX]
Type code BM3200, BM3300 with EtherCAT
®
 SoE profile:
BM3XXX-XXXX-XXXXX[-X]-7XXXX[-S0X]-XX[-XX][-EXX][-#XX]
X3
X4
EtherCAT
®
 IN
EtherCAT
®
 OUT
Number of bus connections 1 IN / 1 OUT
Bus connection RJ 45
Number of parameters  refer to
parameter handbook BM3000
Data width of parameters 16 / 32 Bit
Baud rates 10 / 100 Mbit/s
1: TX+
2: TX-
3: RX+
4: reserved
5: reserved
6: RX-
7: reserved
8: reserved
X3
X4







Installation
Instruction handbook b maXX BM3000, BM3200, BM3300
Document no. 5.11018.11 
123
of 218
7
VARAN Type code BM3200, BM3300 with VARAN profile:
BM3XXX-XXXX-XXXXX[-X]-2XXXX[-S0X]-XX[-XX][-EXX][-#XX]
X3
X4
VARAN IN
VARAN OUT
Number of bus connections 1 IN / 1 OUT
Bus connection RJ 45
Number of parameters refer to
parameter handbook BM3000
Data width of parameters 16 / 32 Bit
Baud rates 10 / 100 Mbit/s
1: TX+
2: TX-
3: RX+
4: reserved
5: reserved
6: RX-
7: reserved
8: reserved
X3
X4






Connections
Instruction handbook b maXX BM3000, BM3200, BM3300
Document no. 5.11018.11 Baumüller Nürnberg GmbH
124
of 218
7.14
CANopen
®
Type code BM3200, BM3300 with CANopen
®
:
BM3XXX-XXXX-XXXXX[-X]-3XXXX[-S0X]-XX[-XX][-EXX][-#XX]
X3
X4
CANopen
®
 IN
CANopen
®
 OUT
Memory 4 kByte DP-RAM, 256 kByte RAM, 
1 MByte Flash-EPROM
Number of bus connections 2, no slot rules
Bus connection 2 connectors RJ45, 8-pin
Baud rates 20/125/250/500/1000 kBit/s
Address range 7 Bit; address 1 to address 127
Address setting DIP-switch
Short-circuit proof RJ45-connection Yes
Isolation Optocoupler, DC/DC-converter
1: CAN_H
2: CAN_L
3: GND
4: reserved
5: reserved
6: GND
7: reserved
8: reserved
X3
X4






Installation
Instruction handbook b maXX BM3000, BM3200, BM3300
Document no. 5.11018.11 
125
of 218
7
POWERLINK
®
Type code BM3200, BM3300 with POWERLINK
®
:
BM3XXX-XXXX-XXXXX[-X]-4XXXX[-S0X]-XX[-XX][-EXX][-#XX]
X3
X4
POWERLINK
®
 IN
POWERLINK
®
 OUT
Number of bus connections 1 IN / 1 OUT
Bus connection RJ 45
Number of parameters  refer to
parameter handbook BM3000
Data width of parameters 16 / 32 Bit
Baud rates 10 / 100 Mbit/s
1: TX+
2: TX-
3: RX+
4: reserved
5: reserved
6: RX-
7: reserved
8: reserved
X3
X4






Connections
Instruction handbook b maXX BM3000, BM3200, BM3300
Document no. 5.11018.11 Baumüller Nürnberg GmbH
126
of 218
7.14
7.14.1.4 X6 - analog inputs/outputs
X6 BM3XXX-XXXX-XXXXX[-X]-XXX1X
Two analog inputs and one analog output are provided.
BM3XXX-XXXX-XXXXX[-X]-XXX2X
Two analog inputs and two analog outputs are provided.
Inputs Resolution 12 Bit
Version Differential input
Input resistance approx. 50 k
Current input max.  200 µA
Sampling rate 125 µs
Input voltage +10 V to -10 V
Outputs Resolution 12 Bit
Output voltage +10 V up to -10 V
tolerance ± 10 %
offset lower than 150 mV
Output current max.
  1 mA
Update rate 62.5 µs
Short-circuit proof limited, max. 10 s
D-sub-connector 
9-pin
1  Analog input 1 +
2  n. c. or analog input 2+, dependent on type, see above
3 GND analog inputs
4  Analog output 1 +
5  Analog output 2 +
6  Analog input 1 -
7  n. c. or analog input 2-, dependent on type, see above
8 GND analog inputs
9 GND analog inputs





Installation
Instruction handbook b maXX BM3000, BM3200, BM3300
Document no. 5.11018.11 
127
of 218
7
7.14.1.5 X7 - encoder connection
X7 switchable:
Resolver 
evaluation
All encoders, that comply with the following technical specification, may also be used:
Pole pair number The ratio between the pole pair number of the motor and 
the pole pair number of the encoder must be an integer.
Current input max. 160 mA
Excitation frequency approx. 8 kHz
Excitation current 160 mA
Ratio 0.5
D-sub-connector 
26-pin
1 GND encoder supply / Ref -
2 reserved *
3 reserved *
4 reserved *
5 reserved *
6 reserved *
7 reserved *
8 reserved *
9 reserved *
10 Resolver Ref +
11 reserved *
12 reserved *
13 reserved *
14 reserved *
15 reserved *
16 reserved *
17 Temperature +
18 Temperature -
19 reserved *
20 reserved *
21 Res A + (COS +)
22 Res A - (COS -)
23 reserved *
24 reserved *
25 Res B + (SIN +)
26 Res B - (SIN -)
* do not occupy





Connections
Instruction handbook b maXX BM3000, BM3200, BM3300
Document no. 5.11018.11 Baumüller Nürnberg GmbH
128
of 218
7.14
Encoder 
evaluation 
HIPERFACE
® 
The encoder evaluation is provided with a HIPERFACE
®
-interface.
The encoders, which meet the following technical specifications, can be used:
Voltage supply 10 V
DC
Signal level HIPERFACE
®
 - specification of the process data 
channel (~1 V
SS
; REFSIN/REFCOS 2.5V)
Current input Max. 250 mA
D-sub-connector 
26-pin
1 GND encoder supply 
2 +10 V encoder supply
3 reserved *
4 COS +
5 COS -
6 SIN +
7 SIN -
8 reserved *
9 reserved *
10 reserved *
11 reserved *
12 reserved *
13 reserved *
14 reserved *
15 reserved *
16 reserved *
17 Temperature +
18 Temperature -
19 RS485 Data +
20 RS485 Data -
21 reserved *
22 reserved *
23 reserved *
24 reserved *
25 reserved *
26 reserved *
* do not occupy





Installation
Instruction handbook b maXX BM3000, BM3200, BM3300
Document no. 5.11018.11 
129
of 218
7
Encoder 
evaluation with 
EnDat
®
 2.1 or SSI
The encoders, which meet the following technical specifications, can be used:
Voltage supply 5 V
DC
 controlled
Signal level ~1 V
SS
Current input Max. 250 mA
D-sub-connector 
26-pin
1 GND encoder supply
2 +5 V encoder supply
3 Clock+
4 A + (COS +)
5 A - (COS -)
6 B + (SIN +)
7 B - (SIN -)
8 reserved *
9 reserved *
10 reserved *
11 Sense GND
12 Sense Vcc
13 Clock-
14 reserved *
15 reserved *
16 reserved *
17 Temperature +
18 Temperature -
19 Data +
20 Data -
21 reserved *
22 reserved *
23 reserved *
24 reserved *
25 reserved *
26 reserved *
* do not occupy





Connections
Instruction handbook b maXX BM3000, BM3200, BM3300
Document no. 5.11018.11 Baumüller Nürnberg GmbH
130
of 218
7.14
Encoder 
evaluation with 
EnDat
®
 2.2
The encoders, which meet the following technical specifications, can be used:
Voltage supply 5 V
DC
 controlled
Signal level ~1 V
SS
Current input Max. 250 mA
D-sub-connector 
26-pin
1 GND encoder supply 
2 +5 V encoder supply
3 Clock+
4 reserved *
5 reserved *
6 reserved *
7 reserved *
8 reserved *
9 reserved *
10 reserved *
11 Sense GND
12 Sense Vcc
13 Clock-
14 reserved *
15 reserved *
16 reserved *
17 reserved *
18 reserved *
19 Data +
20 Data -
21 reserved *
22 reserved *
23 reserved *
24 reserved *
25 reserved *
26 reserved *
* do not occupy





Installation
Instruction handbook b maXX BM3000, BM3200, BM3300
Document no. 5.11018.11 
131
of 218
7
Sine or 
square wave
encoder 
evaluation
The encoders, which meet the following technical specifications, can be used:
Voltage supply 5 V
DC
 controlled
Signal level RS422 (TTL) for square wave incremental encoders
~1 Vss for sine incremental encoders
Current input Max. 250 mA
D-sub-connector 
26-pin
1 GND encoder supply
2 +5 V encoder supply
3 reserved *
4 RS422 A +
5 RS422 A -
6 RS422 B +
7 RS422 B -
8 RS422 0 +
9 RS422 0 -
10 reserved *
11 Sense GND
12 Sense V
CC
13 reserved *
14 reserved *
15 reserved *
16 reserved *
17 Temperature +
18 Temperature -
19 reserved *
20 reserved *
21 reserved *
22 reserved *
21 reserved *
22 reserved *
23 reserved *
24 reserved *
25 reserved *
26 reserved *
* do not occupy





Connections
Instruction handbook b maXX BM3000, BM3200, BM3300
Document no. 5.11018.11 Baumüller Nürnberg GmbH
132
of 218
7.14
Encoder 
evaluation with
HIPERFACE DSL
®
The encoders, which meet the following technical specifications, can be used:
Signal level HIPERFACE DSL
®
Current input Max. 250 mA
D-sub-connector 
26-pin
1 GND encoder supply
2 10 V encoder supply
3 reserved *
4 reserved *
5 reserved *
6 reserved *
7 reserved *
8 reserved *
9 reserved *
10 reserved *
11 reserved *
12 reserved *
13 reserved *
14 reserved *
15 reserved *
16 reserved *
17 reserved *
18 reserved *
19 DSL-
20 DSL+
21 reserved *
22 reserved *
21 reserved *
22 reserved *
23 reserved *
24 reserved *
25 reserved *
26 reserved *
* do not occupy
NOTE!
The use of the standard accessory connector included in the accessory kit 
HIPERFACE DSL
®
 (part No. 460377) is required.





Installation
Instruction handbook b maXX BM3000, BM3200, BM3300
Document no. 5.11018.11 
133
of 218
7
7.14.2 Connections BM3200, BM3300 on top
3-phase device with internal ballast resistor BM3XXX-XTXX-XXXXX-B-XXXXX-
Figure 53: Connections at the top, BM3XXX-XT with internal ballast resistor
X300: 
Signal bus 
X202:
Power supply connection
X205:
Connection
DC-link
X200:
24V-voltage supply





Connections
Instruction handbook b maXX BM3000, BM3200, BM3300
Document no. 5.11018.11 Baumüller Nürnberg GmbH
134
of 218
7.14
3-phase device without internal ballast resistor BM3XXX-XTXX-XXXXX-E-XXXXX-
Figure 54: Connections at the top, BM3XXX-XT without internal ballast resistor
X300: 
Signal bus 
X203:
Power supply connection
Ballast resistor connection
DC link connection
X200:
24V-voltage supply
NOTE!
The ballast resistor connection is not short-circuit proof.
When using devices BM3200, BM3300 without internal ballast resistor an external 
ballast resistor must be connected in case of braking operation.





Installation
Instruction handbook b maXX BM3000, BM3200, BM3300
Document no. 5.11018.11 
135
of 218
7
1-phase device with internal ballast resistor BM3XXX-XEXX-XXXXX-B-XXXXX-
Figure 55: Connections at the top, BM3XXX-XE with internal ballast resistor
X300: 
Signal bus 
X202:
Power supply connection
X205:
Connection
DC-link
X200:
24V-voltage supply





Connections
Instruction handbook b maXX BM3000, BM3200, BM3300
Document no. 5.11018.11 Baumüller Nürnberg GmbH
136
of 218
7.14
1-phase device without internal ballast resistor BM3XXX-XEXX-XXXXX-E-XXXXX-
Figure 56: Connections at the top, BM3XXX-XE without internal ballast resistor
X300: 
Signal bus 
X202:
Power supply connection
X205:
Connection
DC-link
Ballast resistor
X200:
24V-voltage supply
NOTE!
The ballast resistor connection is not short-circuit proof.
When using devices BM3200, BM3300 without internal ballast resistor an external 
ballast resistor must be connected in case of braking operation.





Installation
Instruction handbook b maXX BM3000, BM3200, BM3300
Document no. 5.11018.11 
137
of 218
7
7.14.2.1 X200 - 24V voltage supply
X200 (SELV/PELV)
Control voltage (U
DC
)
according to EN 61131-2:1994, table 7
+ 24 V -15 % / +20 %
Also see ZRequ
irements to the control voltage / 24 V-supply– on page 28.
The control voltage must accord to PELV (EN 61800-5-1, chapter 3.21) and accordingly 
to SELV (EN 61800-5-1, chapter 3.35).
At a control voltage of < 24 V the fan power is reduced. Therefore, it can be necessary, 
to reduce the output current.
Max. conductor 
cross-section
Termination system Loading capacity
1,5 mm
2
(2-wire cabling, 2-pin) 
Connector,
spring clamp termination
max. 2,0 A
Connector max. 20 A
1 +24V 
2  M24V






Connections
Instruction handbook b maXX BM3000, BM3200, BM3300
Document no. 5.11018.11 Baumüller Nürnberg GmbH
138
of 218
7.14
7.14.2.2 X202, X203, X205 - power supply, DC link, ballast resistor connection
NOTE!
A device of the series BM3200, BM3300 can be operated as a compact servo unit 
and accordingly as an axis unit.
NOTE!
A proper execution of BM3200, BM3300 as an axis unit can only be ensured at 
Baumüller supply units (mains rectifiers).
The DC-link terminal is not protected against overload, polarity reversal or ground 
fault.
A connection of one or several DC-link terminals of the BM3200, BM3300 to an active 
mains rectifier unit is forbidden.
NOTE!
The ballast resistor connection is not short-circuit proof.
When using devices BM3200, BM3300 without internal ballast resistor an external 
ballast resistor must be connected in case of braking operation.





Installation
Instruction handbook b maXX BM3000, BM3200, BM3300
Document no. 5.11018.11 
139
of 218
7
X202  BM3XXX-XTXX-XXXXX-B-XXXXX-, device with internal ballast resistor
Power supply
1U1, 1V1, 1W1
X202 BM3XXX-XE, device with/without internal ballast resistor
Power supply
L, N
X203 BM3XXX-XTXX-XXXXX-E-XXXXX-, device without internal ballast resistor
Power supply
1U1, 1V1, 1W1
DC link connection
1C1, 1D1
Ballast resistor connection
1C1, Ba-
X205 BM3XXX-XTXX-XXXXX-B-XXXXX-, device with internal ballast resistor
BM3XXX-XEXX-XXXXX-B-XXXXX-, device with internal ballast resistor
DC link connection
1C1, 1D1
X205 BM3XXX-XEXX-XXXXX-E-XXXXX-, device without internal ballast resistor
DC link connection
1C1, 1D1
Ballast resistor connection
1C1, Ba-
PE See ZPE connections BM3200, BM3300 rear panel– from page 145.
Connection system Loading capacity
Connector,
screw terminal
Connector max. 20 A
Minimum Maximum
Conductor cross-section
single-wire
flexible
with wire end ferrule 
(with/without shroud)
0.08 mm² / AWG28
0.08 mm² / AWG28
0.2 mm²
4 mm² / AWG12
4 mm² / AWG12
2.5 mm²
Tightening torque 0.4 Nm 0.5 Nm
Screwdriver blade 0.6 x 3.5 mm
Remove insulation 7 mm / 0.9 in






Connections
Instruction handbook b maXX BM3000, BM3200, BM3300
Document no. 5.11018.11 Baumüller Nürnberg GmbH
140
of 218
7.14
7.14.2.3 X300 - signal bus
If a system of b maXX devices is installed with signal bus connection, then all devices are 
connected with one another via the signal bus. The bus including the supply unit can be 
scanned by each participant and individual signals can be set. Via this bus the supply unit 
can indicate errors to the axes, so that the individual axes can react. Each axis can gen-
erate messages to the other axes, for example failures, ballast resistors on or warning 
signal bus.
NOTE!
Dependent on the type of the used device
BM3XXX-XXXX-XXXXX[-X]-XXX1X
up to 12 devices can be connected
or 
BM3XXX-XXXX-XXXXX[-X]-XXX2X
up to 30 devices can be connected.





Installation
Instruction handbook b maXX BM3000, BM3200, BM3300
Document no. 5.11018.11 
141
of 218
7
Signal bus
X300
Notes for the installation of signal bus cables:
Figure 57: Installation of signal bus cable
1 Always, attach the flat cable holder from the left to the first device and at the same 
position. Put the leftovers of the flat cable holder as a loop between the flat cable hold-
er and the connector.
2 F
rom the second device onwards, always attach the flat cable holder from the left and 
always at the same position.
The signal bus cables are not included in the 
delivery scope and must be ordered sepa-
rately. Available cables and flat cable holders see ZCable signal bus– on page 181.






Connections
Instruction handbook b maXX BM3000, BM3200, BM3300
Document no. 5.11018.11 Baumüller Nürnberg GmbH
142
of 218
7.14
7.14.3 Connections BM3200, BM3300 at the bottom
Figure 58: Connections at the bottom
X101: 
Connection
motor temperature
X102:
STO-connection
X107:
Motor connection
1U2, 1V2, 1W2





Installation
Instruction handbook b maXX BM3000, BM3200, BM3300
Document no. 5.11018.11 
143
of 218
7
7.14.3.1 X101 - motor temperature
X101 (SELV/PELV)
7.14.3.2 X102 - safe torque off - option
X102 (SELV/PELV)
Max. connector cross-section Termination system
1.0 mm² Connector, 
s
pring clamp termination
Termination system
Connector, 
spring clamp termination
Minimum Maximum
Connector cross-section
single-wire
flexible
with wire end ferrule 
(without/with shroud)
0.2 mm² / AWG28
0.2 mm² / AWG28
0.2 mm²
1.5 mm² / AWG16
1.5 mm² / AWG16
1.5 mm² / 1 mm² 
1 Motor temperature +
2 Motor temperature -
2
1

STO1: X102-1/2
STO2: X102-4/5
Digital input according EN61131-2 type 2 
with following change:
Low
Voltage: -0.3 ... 5 V
I
L
 at 5 V: max. 23 mA
eff
High
Voltage: 20 ... 30 V
I
L
 at 20 V: max. 31 mA
eff
I
L
 at 30 V: min. 35 mA
eff
Max. reaction time max. 30 ms





Connections
Instruction handbook b maXX BM3000, BM3200, BM3300
Document no. 5.11018.11 Baumüller Nürnberg GmbH
144
of 218
7.14
7.14.3.3 X107 - motor connection
X107
1U2, 1V2, 1W2
PE See ZPE connections BM3200, BM3300 rear panel– from page 145.
5  STO 2 GND
4  STO 2 24V
3 n. c.
2  STO 1 GND
1  STO 1 24 V
1
5

NOTE!
The used power supply must comply with the defined voltage drop according 
EN60204-1.
Connection system Loading capacity
Connector, 
screw terminal
is limited by the device, 
also see ZElectrical data– from page 35 
connector max. 20 A
Minimum Maximum
Max. cross-section
single-wired
fine-wired
with ferrule
(with/without protective 
over)
0.08 mm² / AWG28
0.08 mm² / AWG28
0.2 mm²
4 mm² / AWG12
4 mm² / AWG12
2.5 mm²
Locking torque 0.4 Nm 0.5 Nm
Screwdriver blade 0.6 x 3.5 mm
Skinning length 7 mm / 0,9 in







Installation
Instruction handbook b maXX BM3000, BM3200, BM3300
Document no. 5.11018.11 
145
of 218
7
7.14.4 PE connections BM3200, BM3300 rear panel
PE: 
Connection PE
PE:
Connection PE
PE:
Connection PE
Figure 59: Connections PE
Max. connector 
cross-section
Connection 
system
Torque
10 mm
2 
copper cables
16 mm
2 
aluminum cables
Cable lug for 
M5
min. 2.2 Nm
max. 3.0 Nm
2 cables
diameter according power supply connection,
see ZX202, X203, X205 - power supply, DC link, bal-
last resistor connection– on page 138
2 x 2,5 mm
2
 with wire end ferrule
2 x 4 mm
2
 without wire end ferrule







Connections
Instruction handbook b maXX BM3000, BM3200, BM3300
Document no. 5.11018.11 Baumüller Nürnberg GmbH
146
of 218
7.14
NOTE!
According to DIN EN 61800-5-1, the following PE connection is required:
Figure 60: Structure of PE-connection
m Also, without the cable, the screw must be firmly tightened and must have a cor-
rect, electrical contact to the cabinet. 
m There is one line lug between two washers and the pressing nut is protected 
against loosening by one spring washer.
m The lug must have a large-surfaced contact, which means, that it should be close 
to the screw.
m The structure must ensure a permanent safe contact.





147
of 218
 Instruction handbook b maXX BM3000, BM3200, BM3300
Document no. 5.11018.11 
8OPERATION
8.1 Safety notes
Basic information
WARNING!
Risk of injury due to improper operation!
Improper operation can lead to severe personal injury or material damage.
Therefore:
m Perform all operational steps according to the details of this Instruction handbook.
m Before beginning work, ensure that all coverings and protective devices are in-
stalled and are functioning properly.
m The control cabinet in which the device is installed should be protected against 
contact with energized parts.
Keep all doors of the control cabinet closed during operation.
NOTICE!
Environmental conditions that do not meet the requirements.
Environmental conditions that are non-compliant can lead to property damage.
Therefore:
m Ensure that the environmental conditions are kept compliant during operation (see 
ZRequired environmental conditions– on page 29).






Bridging charge resistance BM3000
Instruction handbook b maXX BM3000, BM3200, BM3300
Document no. 5.11018.11 Baumüller Nürnberg GmbH
148
of 218
8.2
8.2 Bridging charge resistance BM3000
Figure 61: Bridging charge resistor X100
WARNING!
Risk of injury due to inadequate qualifications!
Inevitably, when operating this electrical device, certain parts of this device are ener-
gized with hazardous voltage. Improper handling can lead to significant personal in-
jury and material damage.
Therefore:
m Only qualified personnel may work on this device!
NOTICE!
The BM3000 can be damaged while charging or operating if the charge resistor is not 
bridged accordingly the notes below.
The LED H100 lights up green as soon as the bridging relay is closed, the BM3000
can provide power after the bridging relay is closed (see ZDisplay elements
BM3000– on page 57).
t
Charging
  U < 20 V, at least for t = 4 s
Input bridging relay
X100
t
t > 4 s
Relay on
DC link voltage








Operation
Instruction handbook b maXX BM3000, BM3200, BM3300
Document no. 5.11018.11 
149
of 218
8
8.3 Operating concept BM3200, BM3300
After the device was put into operation, it is parameterized (adapted to the application). If 
the parameterization is completed the device can be operated either with the pulse en-
able signal or with pulse enable signal and quick stop signal.
8.3.1 Enable signals
These signals must have a signal level of 24 V
DC 
and must be connected to the terminals 
(ZX2 - Digital inputs/outputs– on page 121), also see ZConnecting diagrams– from page 
98.
Pulse enable During operation the signal „Pulse enable“ always must be activated, so that the device 
can supply power. A running motor coasts down, if the signal is set to 0 V.
Quick stop 
(optional)
Only switch off the „quick stop“ signal if the system / the device must be stopped as quick-
ly as possible, the drive reaction can be adjusted (see the parameter manual)
During operation, the „quick stop“ signal must be continuously provided in order for the 
device to provide output.
Which digital input is used a quick stop input can be parameterized (see parameter man-
ual b maXX 3000, 5.12001).
8.3.2 Monitoring
The controller part monitors the device during operation. If the controller part detects a 
condition, which deviates from normal operation, the device generates a warning/an error 
message.
Warning If the controller part detects an operational condition, which exceeds a warning limit, an 
according warning is either shown by the display or by the control. The device shows the 
most important warning (current limit reached) via the LED H13 (see ZDisplay- and op-
erating elements BM3200, BM3300– from page 58).
Error message If the controller part detects, that the device is not operating correctly, this is shown via 
the 7-segment-display, see ZPage 62– and the LEDs H11 to H14, see ZPage 63–.
For further information see ZTroubleshooting and Fault Correction– from page 171.













DC-link load / switch-on frequency of power supply
Instruction handbook b maXX BM3000, BM3200, BM3300
Document no. 5.11018.11 Baumüller Nürnberg GmbH
150
of 218
8.4
8.3.3 Service interface
The service interface transfers controller parameters from a PC/laptop to the controller 
via the parameterization software ProDrive.
h co
nnect a free USB-port of the PC/laptop with the controller.
The driver for this connection was installed on the PC/laptop with ProDrive. The settings 
of the connection (baud rate, etc.) are made in ProDrive. See ProDrive Online help.
8.4 DC-link load / switch-on frequency of power supply
Switch-on frequency accords to the time between two switch-on procedures. This period 
cannot be selected freely, as each switch-on procedure is connected with a thermal load 
of the precharge resistors. 
These precharge resistors limit the starting current, when switching on the power supply 
voltage. 
NOTE!
Only, 
the service cable BM5-K-USB-XXX must be used for the X1-service interface. 
Also see ZCable service interface– on page 182. The maximum transmission rate is 
920 kBaud.
NOTE!
If the service cable is not used, keep it in its ESD-packaging.
NOTE!
Between two switch-on procedures, there must be at least 3 minutes. If the time, 
which is required to cool down is under this time, thermal overload and destruction of 
the precharge resistors can occur.






Operation
Instruction handbook b maXX BM3000, BM3200, BM3300
Document no. 5.11018.11 
151
of 218
8
8.5 Optional safety function STO of BM3300
8.5.1 Safety notes according STO function (Safe Torque Off)
WARNING!
m When STO is activated, the drive is not disconnected from power supply.
m The safety function Safe Torque Off (STO) is not sufficient as the only safety 
function for drives which are affected by a permanent moment, for example, in 
case of suspended loads.
m The function STO may only be operated in combination with emergency stop 
devices according to DIN EN ISO 13850 or safety sensors according to EN 61496.
WARNING!
In the unlikely event of a total failure of an internal driver (IGBT) or a control element, 
a temporary excitation of the drive can occur (also if STO is active). The angular 
movement covered depends on the rotor position and the number of pole pairs of the 
motor. The maximum is 180°/number of pole pairs.
DANGER!
Danger due to moving engine parts! 
The supply of the inputs by a connected safety component (emergency stop device, 
safety light curtain) leads to the immediate supply of the driver stage. A converter 
failure may lead to an unexpected start-up. Ensure by the use of the external safety 
components that an unexpected start-up is prevented during commissioning.
Therefore: 
m Maintain an adequate distance from moving machine parts/line parts or from the 
moving machine/line. 





Optional safety function STO of BM3300
Instruction handbook b maXX BM3000, BM3200, BM3300
Document no. 5.11018.11 Baumüller Nürnberg GmbH
152
of 218
8.5
8.5.2 Safety levels and safety notes
Type code BM3300 with safety function STO (Safe Torque Off):
BM33XX-XXXX-XXXXX[-X]-XXXXX[-S00
]-XX[-XX][-EXX][-#XX]
Safety version optional
S00: Safety function STO
There is no conformity to the safety standards.
Permitted for process protection only.
S01: Safety function STO
Safety claim PLe / SIL3 (for replacement only)
S02: Safety function STO
Safety claim PLe / SIL3
with short-circuit detection (standard type)
according EN ISO 13849-1 and EN 62061
The Baumüller compact servo unit 
BM33XX-XXXX-XXXXX[-X]-XXXXX-S01/S02-XX[-XX][-EXX][-#XX] 
provides the safety function STO (Safe Torque Off).
m The drive is without torque in STO function.
m The activation of the power amplifier is reliable disabled.
m The STO function fulfills the stop category 0 according EN 60204-1.
If no load is active on the motor shaft, the drive will coast to a standstill. For this reason 
no active danger is caused by the drive in case of an enabled STO function. A restart of 
the drive is not possible without a reset of the STO function. 
NOTE!
Devices with the approval mark of TÜV Rheinland and the Safety label provide a cer-
tified safety function, only, refer to ZPage 22–.






Operation
Instruction handbook b maXX BM3000, BM3200, BM3300
Document no. 5.11018.11 
153
of 218
8
The STO function of the devices 
BM33XX-XXXX-XXXXX[-X]-XXXXX-S01/S02 
complies with the following safety levels and standards:
m Characteristic data according IEC 61508-1 to 7 and IEC 62061
(data for use of the device as a subsystem in safety functions)
n Safety Integrity Level SIL CL 3
n PFH: 3.6 x 10
-10 
1/h, corresponds to 0.4 % of SIL 3
n PFD
av
: 3.2 x 10
-5
corresponds to 3.2 % of SIL 3
n Proof Test interval 20 a
Remark:  At a PFH value, which is < 1 % of the allowed SIL-threshold, the perfor-
mance of special Proof Tests within the mission time of the product is re-
garded as not necessary. 
m Characteristic data according EN ISO 13849-1
n Performance Level PL e
n Category: Cat 4
n MTTFd: high (751 a)
n Diagnostic Coverage: high (99 %)
For further information call our application department. 
8.5.3 Function
In case of a failure or on request (by activating an emergency stop device, interrupting a 
safety light curtain), the STO function ensures that the power supply of the converter in 
the power stage is shut down safely and the pulse inhibitor is activated. Thus, the motor 
can no longer generate a rotating field. The mains supply is not disconnected from the 
motor when the shut down function is activated.
The safety relay function is based on the fail-safe principle. The safety function STO „safe 
torque off“ is active, as long as there is no voltage at the input terminals (X102). There-
fore, the functioning of the safety function is ensured at voltage failure, also. In order to 
deactivate „safe torque off“, a voltage of 24 V must be applied to the terminals (X102). 
The error „Shut down because of safety function“, error No. 1013 is generated if the 
BM3300 is in state „Operation enabled“ and the voltage on the input of the STO function 
is switched off.
The warning „Safety function“, warning No. 1046 is generated if the BM3300 is in another 
state except „Operation enabled“ and the voltage on the input of the STO function is 
switched off. The warning is reset as soon as the voltage is available again.





Optional safety function STO of BM3300
Instruction handbook b maXX BM3000, BM3200, BM3300
Document no. 5.11018.11 Baumüller Nürnberg GmbH
154
of 218
8.5
8.5.4 Timing 
24V STOA
24V STOB
STO VWDWH "S01"
STO VWDWH "S02"

Td
Td
Td2
Td2
Td
Td
TdTd2
QRW STO
QRW STO
QRW STO
QRW STO
QRW STO
STO
STO
STO
STO
STO

Figure 62: Timing STO function
T
d
: < 40 ms
T
d2
: max. 30 ms
n th
e controller is enabled after 40 ms, when both voltages are activated
n th
e controller is disabled after max. 30 ms, when one voltage deactivated
8.5.5 Supply with separate power supplies
GND
GND
+24 V
+24 V

Figure 63: Supply with separate power supplies





Operation
Instruction handbook b maXX BM3000, BM3200, BM3300
Document no. 5.11018.11 
155
of 218
8
8.5.6 Examples for input wiring
Depending on the input wiring of the STO function, it can be operated with different safety 
components (emergency stop device, electronic safety sensor). The examples in the 
following sections show the wiring of the STO option for the operation with an emergency 
stop device, a safety light grid and the Baumüller Safety I/O terminal SO4000.
Operation with 
emergency stop 
device
The following example for the wiring of an emergency stop device with the STO module 
ensures that short circuits on the input side are detected. 
BM33XX-XXXX-
XXXXX-X-XXXXX-
S01
In case of a short circuit on the input side between A   B the converter always switches 
to the STO (Safe Torque Off) status.
Figure 64: STO function S01: Operation with emergency stop device
WARNING!
The power supply unit for generating the 24 Volt electrical supply must meet the 
requirements for PELV according to EN 60204-1.
BM3300 bottom
X102
5
4
3
2
1
0 V DC
24 V DC
Emergency stop
A
B
0V
DC
24 V
DC






Optional safety function STO of BM3300
Instruction handbook b maXX BM3000, BM3200, BM3300
Document no. 5.11018.11 Baumüller Nürnberg GmbH
156
of 218
8.5
BM33XX-XXXX-
XXXXX-X-XXXXX-
S02
BM3300 bottom
X102
5
4
3
2
1
Emergency stop
24 V
DC
0V
DC
24 V
DC
0V
DC
A
B

In case of a short circuit on the input side between A   B or A  0 V
DC
 or B  24 V
DC
, 
the converter always switches to the STO (Safe Torque Off) status.
A short circuit between A 
 24 V
DC
 or B  0 V
DC
 is detected in state STO, the drive re-
mains in state STO
Figure 65: STO function S02: Operation with emergency stop device





Operation
Instruction handbook b maXX BM3000, BM3200, BM3300
Document no. 5.11018.11 
157
of 218
8
Operation with 
safety light grid
If the STO function is operated with a safety light grid or a safety control, the reference 
potential (0 V) is hard-wired on the input side. The two-channel shut down is then 
performed by two safety outputs (monitored by the safety sensor) which provide the two-
channel supply for the STO function. 
Figure 66: STO function: Operation with safety light grid
Operation with 
Baumüller Safety 
I/O terminal 
SO4000
The output terminal SO4000 shown provides bipolar safety outputs. For connection of the 
STO function, the 0 V switching output is wired with pin 2/5. The corresponding 24 V 
switching output is wired with terminal pin 1/4.
Short circuits of the outputs of the Baumüller Safety output terminal SO4000 to supply 
potentials or between the outputs are detected by the output terminal and lead to the shut 
down.
Figure 67: STO function: Operation with SO4000
BM3300 bottom
X102
5
4
3
2
1
n
Safety light
grid
GND
OSSD2
OSSD1
Control unit
with OSSD outputs

BM3300 bottom
X102
5
4
3
2
1
24 V DC
Baumüller
Safety I/O terminals
SO4000
Output 1
24 V
Output 1
0 V






Fieldbus communication
Instruction handbook b maXX BM3000, BM3200, BM3300
Document no. 5.11018.11 Baumüller Nürnberg GmbH
158
of 218
8.6
8.6 Fieldbus communication
Depending on the version of BM3200, BM3300 (see ZType plate– on page 51 and ac-
cordingly ZType code– from page 53), communication can be made via different fieldbus 
systems.
8.6.1 EtherCAT
®
.
Type code BM3200, BM3300 with EtherCAT
®  
CoE profile:
BM3XXX-XXXX-XXXXX[-X]-1XXXX[-S0X]-XX[-XX][-EXX][-#XX]
Type code BM3200, BM3300 with EtherCAT
® 
SoE profile:
BM3XXX-XXXX-XXXXX[-X]-7XXXX[-S0X]-XX[-XX][-EXX][-#XX]
Via the BM3200, BM3300 with EtherCAT
®
 slave, data can be transmitted to and from oth-
er nodes (e. g. from the EtherCAT
®
 master). 
X3 and X4 on the front side of the device are the RJ45 connections for EtherCAT
®
-line 
(also see ZBM3200, BM3300 front side– on page 120). 
Mounting and 
installation
The mounting/installation consists of the following steps:
1 De-energize the BM3200, BM3300 device
2 at the BM3200, BM3300 IP-address set,
see ZSettings address switches– on page 66 
3 Connect BM3200, BM3300 with Ethernet-connection cables.
n Please, observe an EMC-compatible laying of the Ethernet connection cables!
n The following cables were released for use by Baumüller:
Ethernet-connection cable; 
Further information see ZCables - EtherCAT®, VARAN, POWERLINK® .– on page 
181.
Commissioning. The following preconditions must be fulfilled before commissioning:
1 BM3200, BM3300 with EtherCAT
®
 is installed correctly.
n Ethernet-connection cables are wired correctly.
2 The control cabinet is properly locked and all safety devices are operating.
3 The BM3200, BM3300 device is ready-to-use.
Address switch By means of the address switches S1 to S4 the IP address is set 
(see ZSettings address switches– from page 66). 
Further information about the setting possibilities of the EtherCAT
®
 slave see „Application 
Manual“.












Operation
Instruction handbook b maXX BM3000, BM3200, BM3300
Document no. 5.11018.11 
159
of 218
8
Parameters The parameter settings determine the behavior of the EtherCAT
®
 slave in operation. Pa-
rameters are set with the software ProDrive.
1 Start ProDrive
2 Click on „Project Tree“.
3 Communication settings with ProDrive
n Project Tree: Configuration/Fieldbus Slave 
(refer also Parameter manual b maXX 3000, 5.12001)
m set Synchronization to „On“
m SYNC time = EtherCAT
®
 cycle time = 125 µs to 8 ms

This setting is not necessary if using the CoE profile (CoE: CANopen
®
 over Eth-
erCAT
®
) and the EtherCAT
®
 master has set the parameter 1C32.02 „Cycle Time“ 
to a valid value or „Distributed Clock“ is set to Sync0.


When using the SoE profile (Servodrive profile over EtherCAT
®
) the fieldbus cy-
cle time can be set via S parameter S-0-0002 or directly via controller parameter 
fieldbus cycle time. In case „Distributed Clock“ is activated the set fieldbus cycle 
time must be identical with the Sync0 Unit cycle. The Sync0 Unit cycle is set via 
the EtherCAT
®
 master. No synchronous operation is possible if this condition is 
not fulfilled. The slave inhibits the change from PreOperational to 

SafeOperational and generates an error message. 





Fieldbus communication
Instruction handbook b maXX BM3000, BM3200, BM3300
Document no. 5.11018.11 Baumüller Nürnberg GmbH
160
of 218
8.6
8.6.2 VARAN.
Type code BM3200, BM3300 with VARAN:
BM3XXX-XXXX-XXXXX[-X]-2XXXX[-S0X]-X
X[-XX][-EXX][-#XX]
A BM32
00, BM3300 with fieldbus option VARAN can communicate with a VARAN mas-
ter.
X3 and X4 on the front side of the device are the RJ45 connections for VARAN (also see 
ZBM3200, BM3300 front side– on page 120). 
Mounting and in-
stallation
The mounting/installation consists of the following steps:
1 De
-energize the BM3200, BM3300 device
2 Set the BM3
200, BM3300 IP-address,
see ZSettin
gs address switches– on page 66
3 Co
nnect BM3200, BM3300 with VARAN bus cables 
(Ethernet-LAN cable at least CAT 5).
n X
3: VARAN-In, X4: VARAN-Out. 
On the first BM
3200, BM3300 node of a VARAN line X3 is connected with the VA-
RAN master. X4 is connected with X3 of the next BM
3200, BM3300 slave in the line, 
and so on. The last node of a VARAN line has no connection of X4 or is connected 
with a PC (tunneling of Ethernet frames via VARAN to the controller, e. g. to com-
municate with ProDrive).
Each slave within the VARAN line can be addr
essed and parametrized via selection 
of its IP address.
Abbildung 68: VARAN fieldbus connection 
NOTE!
A point-to-point connection between PC (ProDrive) and BM3200, BM3300 VARAN 
slave X4 for commissioning is possible even without a VARAN master.







Operation
Instruction handbook b maXX BM3000, BM3200, BM3300
Document no. 5.11018.11 
161
of 218
8
n Please, observe an EMC-compatible laying of the Ethernet connection cables!
n The following cables were released for use by Baumüller:
Ethernet connection cable; 
Further information see ZCables - EtherCAT®, VARAN, POWERLINK® .– on page 
181.
Commissioning. The following preconditions must be fulfilled before commissioning:
1 BM3200, BM3300 with VARAN is installed correctly.
n Ethernet connection cables are wired correctly.
2 The control cabinet is properly locked and all safety devices are operating.
3 The BM3200, BM3300 device is ready-to-use.
4 Create a Lasal-Class2 project using the driver classes for BM3200, BM3300 drives for 
cyclic and service data communication.
5 Start the VARAN control
Address switch By means of the address switches S1 to S4 the IP-address is set 
(See settings ZSetting the IP address with address switches– from page 67).
Parameters The parameter settings determine the behavior of the VARAN-Slave in operation. Param-
eters are set with the software ProDrive.
1 Start ProDrive
2 Click on „Project Tree“.
3 Communication settings with ProDrive
n Project Tree: Configuration/Fieldbus Slave 
(refer also Parameter manual BM3200, BM3300)
m set Synchronization to „On“
m set Fieldbus cycle time according VARAN cycle time (1 ms, 2 ms, 4 ms or 8 ms)








Fieldbus communication
Instruction handbook b maXX BM3000, BM3200, BM3300
Document no. 5.11018.11 Baumüller Nürnberg GmbH
162
of 218
8.6
8.6.3 CANopen
®
.
Type code BM3
200, BM3300 with CANopen
®
:
BM3XXX-XXXX-XXXXX[-X]-3XXXX[-S0X]-X
X[-XX][-EXX][-#XX]
The data can be transmitted to all the other CAN-users (e g from CANopen
®
 master) via 
the BM3200, BM3300. 
X3 and X4 are the RJ45 connections for CAN bus cables (also see ZBM3200, BM3300 
front side– on page 120), which are on the front side of the device. 
Mounting and 
installation
The mounting / installation consists of th
e following steps:
1 De
-energize BM3200, BM3300 device
2 Se
t address and baud rate (transfer rate) at the BM3200, BM3300,
see ZCAN
open
®
– on page 69.
3 Co
nnect BM3200, BM3300 with CANopen
®
-bus cables (and, if necessary, a terminat-
ed connector).
n Co
mply to EMC-oriented laying of CANopen
®
 connection cables!
n Ba
umüller released the following cables for use:
CANopen
®
 connection cable; 
further information see ZAccessor
ies - CANopen®.– on page 182.
Commissioning The following preconditions must be fulfilled before commissioning can be made:
1 BM3200, BM3300 w
ith CANopen
®
 is correctly installed.
n CAN
open
®
-connection cables are correctly wired.
2 T
he control cabinet has been locked correctly and the safety devices have been put 
into operation.
3 T
he BM3200, BM3300 device is ready-to-use.
Address switch By means of the address switch S1 to S4 the settings, 
like e.g. the baud rate (transfer 
rate) and the address setting (slave No. /ID) are made 
(see ZCANopen
®
– on page 69). 
Further information about parameter setting of the CANopen
®
 slave, see „Application 
Manual“.
Process of 
commissioning
The test-commissioning is divided into the follow
ing sections:
1 Co
nfiguration of the CANopen
®
 slave
2 T
esting of the CANopen
®
 slave
NOTE!
If the BM3200, BM3300 device is the last bus node in the line, X4 must be terminated 
with a terminating connector (see ZAccessories - CANopen®.– on page 182).











Operation
Instruction handbook b maXX BM3000, BM3200, BM3300
Document no. 5.11018.11 
163
of 218
8
Configuring the CANopen
®
 slave
The CANopen
®
 is configured at the running device with ProDrive and a NMT-Master. 
1 Switch on BM3200, BM3300 with CANopen
®
2 Start ProDrive
3 Ensure, that the CANopen
®
 slave communicates with the NMT-Master (the slave re-
ports to the master with the boot-up telegram), i. e. CAN-telegrams can be send/re-
ceived.
Make the following settings:
4 ProDrive: Activate communication source (see Parameter Manual: Drive manager)
5 NMT-Master: Create PDO-Mapping 
(see Programming Manual CANopen
®
“)
6 NMT-Master: with the NMT-command :=1 into the state „OPERATIONAL change“, 
then the cyclic communication starts.
Testing of the CANopen
®
-Slave
The CANopen
®
 slave is tested, by using the total CANopen
®
 network.
ProDrive does not indicate errors, the CANopen
®
 slave was commissioned.
Operation Avoid a reset of the BM3200, BM3300 in the cyclical operation of the CANopen
®
 slave.
WARNING!
Risk of injury due to moving parts!
Rotating and/or linearly moving parts can causesevere injuries.
If a reset of the BM3200, BM3300 device is released in the running cyclical operation 
or if the communication source is switched off, this can cause unwanted conditions 
in the active application. 
Therefore:
m Ensure, that the NMT master does not execute a reset, as long as the BM3200, 
BM3300 device is in the cyclical operation
m Ensure, that the CANopen
®
 communication source only is able to communicate 
with the BM3200, BM3300 device.
NOTE!
After a reset the booting data set is loaded in the controller. In addition the mapping 
is set on the CANopen
®
, which was saved in the controller part before the reset was 
executed.





Fieldbus communication
Instruction handbook b maXX BM3000, BM3200, BM3300
Document no. 5.11018.11 Baumüller Nürnberg GmbH
164
of 218
8.6
8.6.4 POWERLINK
®
.
Type code BM3200, BM3300 with POWERLINK
®
:
BM3XXX-XXXX-XXXXX[-X]-4XXXX[-S0X]-XX[-XX][-EXX][-#XX]
BM3200, BM3300 devices can communicate with a POWERLINK
® 
Managing Node via 
the fieldbus connection POWERLINK
®
. 
X3 and X4 on the front side of the device are the RJ45 connections for POWERLINK
®
(also see ZBM3200, BM3300 front side– on page 120). 
Mounting and in-
stallation.
The mounting/installation consists of the following steps:
1 De-energize the BM3200, BM3300 device
2 Set the BM3200, BM3300 IP-address,
see ZSettings address switches– on page 66.
3 Connect BM3200, BM3300 with Ethernet-connection cables.
n Please, observe an EMC-compatible laying of the Ethernet connection cables!
n The following cables were released for use by Baumüller:
Ethernet-connection cable; 
Further information see ZCables - EtherCAT®, VARAN, POWERLINK® .– on page 
181.
Commissioning The following preconditions must be fulfilled before commissioning:
1 BM3200, BM3300 with POWERLINK
®
 is installed correctly.
n Ethernet-connection cables are wired correctly.
2 The control cabinet is properly locked and all safety devices are operating.
3 The BM3200, BM3300 device is ready-to-use.
Address switch By means of the address switches S3 and S4 the last byte of the IP-address is set 
(See settings ZSettings address switches– on page 66). 
IP address 192.168.100.0 is not allowed.
Further information about the setting possibilities of the POWERLINK
®
 Controlled Node 
see „Application Manual“.
Parameters The parameter settings determine the behavior of the POWERLINK
®
 Controlled Node in 
operation. Parameters are set with the software ProDrive.
1 Start ProDrive
2 Click on „Project Tree“.
3 Communication settings with ProDrive
n Project Tree: Configuration/Fieldbus Slave 
(refer also Parameter manual BM3200, BM3300)
m set Synchronization to „On“
m SYNC time = Fieldbus cycle time = POWERLINK
®
 cycle time = 500 µs to 8 ms

This setting is not necessary if using the POWERLINK
®
 profile and the POWER-
LINK
®
 Managing Node sets a valid value in object 0x1006 „Communication cycle 
period“.










165
of 218
 Instruction handbook b maXX BM3000, BM3200, BM3300
Document no. 5.11018.11 
9MAINTENANCE
9.1 Safety notes
Basic information
9.2 Environmental conditions
If the stipulated environmental conditions are adhered to, then the device is maintenance-
free. For the prescribed environmental conditions, see ZRequired environmental condi-
tions– on page 29. 
The most important stipulated environmental conditions are:
m Dust-free ambient air
m Temperature: Min. 5 °C to max. +55 °C
m Relative humidity:  5 % to 85 %, no condensation
m Installation altitude:  From 1000 m and higher derating 
WARNING!
Risk of injury due to improperly performed maintenance work!
Improper maintenance can lead to severe personal injury and material damage.
Therefore:
m Before beginning work, make sure that there is adequate working clearance.
m Make sure that the mounting area is kept clean and orderly. Parts and tools that 
are loosely stacked or are lying around can cause accidents.







Inspection intervals - maintenance notes
Instruction handbook b maXX BM3000, BM3200, BM3300
Document no. 5.11018.11 Baumüller Nürnberg GmbH
166
of 218
9.3
9.3 Inspection intervals - maintenance notes
Preventive maintenance is prescribed to keep the device in an optimum operating condi-
tion and ensure a long service life. It is recommended to have inspections performed reg-
ularly by qualified personnel. 
Daily 
inspection:
Basic check points as to whether discrepancies have occurred during operation: 
m Does the motor work as requested?
m Is the operating environment normal?
m Is the cooling system working normal?
m Is there an unusual vibration or noise during operation?
m Does the motor overheat during operation?
Regularly 
scheduled
inspection:
Before inspection, switch off the input voltage and wait until the device's capacitors have 
discharged.
DANGER!
Risk of fatal injury from electrical current!
Therefore:
m Switch off voltage before performing work!
m Only qualified personnel may mount, install and maintain the devices. 
m Please remove all metallic objects worn, such as watches or rings, for example, 
before beginning to work on the device. 
m Insulated tools are permitted, only.





Maintenance
Instruction handbook b maXX BM3000, BM3200, BM3300
Document no. 5.11018.11 
167
of 218
9
9.3.1 Periodic maintenance
m environmental condition
Check points Methods and criteria Inspection intervals
Daily Semi-
an
nu-
ally
Annu-
ally
Check environmental temperature, humidity and 
vibr
ations.
Check, whether dust, oil or water drops are visible.
Visual inspection and measurement of the environmen-
tal conditions, comparison with standard values.
O
Check, whether there are hazardous objects in the 
vi
cinity.
Visual inspection O
m Voltage
Check points Methods and criteria Inspection intervals
Daily Semi-
ann
u-
ally
Annu-
ally
Check the voltage of the power supply network 
and the
 control circuits
Measurement and comparison with standard values. O
DANGER!
Risk of fatal injury from electrical current!
Stored electric charge.
Discharge time of the modular system = discharge time of the device with the longest 
DC link discharge time in the modular system.
Refer to Z Electrical Data –.
Therefore:
m Do not touch before taking into account the discharge time of the capacitors and 
electrically live parts.
m Heed corresponding notes on the equipment.
m If additional capacitors are connected to the intermediate circuit, the intermediate 
circuit discharge can take a much longer time. In this case, the necessary waiting 
period must itself be determined or a measurement made as to whether the equip-
ment is de-energized. This discharge time must be posted, together with an IEC 
60417-5036 (2002-10) warning symbol, on a clearly visible location of the control 
cabinet.





Inspection intervals - maintenance notes
Instruction handbook b maXX BM3000, BM3200, BM3300
Document no. 5.11018.11 Baumüller Nürnberg GmbH
168
of 218
9.3
m Mechanical parts
Check points Methods and criteria Inspection intervals
Daily Semi-
annu-
ally
Annu-
ally
Are there any abnormal noises or vibrations? Visual and audio check O
Are there any loose screws? Tighten the screws. O
Are there any bent or damaged parts? Visual inspection O
Have there been any color changes due to over-
heating?
Visual inspection O
Are there any dust or dirt deposits? Visual inspection O
m Power supply
Check points Methods and criteria Inspection intervals
Daily Semi-
ann
u-
ally
Annu-
ally
Are there any missing or loose screws? Replace the screws or, respectively
, tighten them. O
Is there any deformation, cracking, damage or 
color 
change on the device as a result of overheat-
ing or aging?
Visual inspection O
Are there any dust or dirt deposits? Visual inspection O
m Connections and circuitry of the power supply
Check points Methods and criteria Inspection intervals
Daily Semi-
ann
u-
ally
Annu-
ally
Does the wiring indicate any color or shape 
change
s due to overheating?
Visual inspection O
Is the wiring insulation damaged or is it discol-
ored?
Visual inspection O
Is there any damage? Visual inspection O
m Transformer and chokes in the main circuit
Check points Methods and criteria Inspection intervals
Daily Semi-
ann
u-
ally
Annu-
ally
Are there any abnormal vibrations or noticeable 
o
dors?
Visual inspection, audio check and odor check O





Maintenance
Instruction handbook b maXX BM3000, BM3200, BM3300
Document no. 5.11018.11 
169
of 218
9
m Solenoid switch and relays in the main circuit
Check points Methods and criteria Inspection intervals
Daily Semi-
a
nnu-
ally
Annu-
ally
Are there any loose screws? Visual and audio check Tighten screws, if necessary. O
Do the switches function correctly? Visual inspection O
m Plug connectors in the main circuit
Check points Methods and criteria Inspection intervals
Daily Semi-
an
nu-
ally
Annu-
ally
Are there any loose screws or connectors? Tighten screws and firmly stick in plug connector. O
Are there any noticeable odors or color 
changes?
Visual inspection and odor check O
Is there any cracking, damage, deformation or 
c
orrosion?
Visual inspection O
Is there any leaking fluid or deformation of the 
cap
acitors?
Visual inspection O
m Cooling system fans
Check points Methods and criteria Inspection intervals
Daily Semi-
an
nu-
ally
Annu-
ally
Are there any abnormal noises or vibrations? Visual and audio check O
Are there any loose screws? Tighten the screws. O
m Cooling system ventilation duct
Check points Methods and criteria Inspection intervals
Daily Semi-
an
nu-
ally
Annu-
ally
Are there any obstructions in the h
eat sink, air 
supply or air outlet?
Visual inspection O





Repairs
Instruction handbook b maXX BM3000, BM3200, BM3300
Document no. 5.11018.11 Baumüller Nürnberg GmbH
170
of 218
9.4
9.4 Repairs
In case of device damage, please inform your sales office or:
Baumüller Nürnberg GmbH
Ostendstr. 80 - 90 
 90482 Nuremberg
 Germany
Tel. +49 9 11 54 32 - 0
Fax: +49 9 11 54 32 - 1 30
Mail: [email protected]
Internet: www.baumueller.de





171
of 218
 Instruction handbook b maXX BM3000, BM3200, BM3300
Document no. 5.11018.11 
10TROUBLESHOOTING AND 
FAULT CORRECTION
10.1 Behavior in case of malfunctions
Basic information
DANGER!
Risk of fatal injury from electrical current!
Inevitably, when operating this electrical device, certain parts of it are energized with 
hazardous voltage.
Therefore:
m Pay heed to areas on the device that could be dangerous.
WARNING!
Risk of injury due to improper fault correction!
Therefore:
m Only qualified personnel may work on this device!
m Personnel that work with the b maXX device must be trained in the safety regula-
tions and the handling of the device, and be familiar with the correct operation of 
it. In particular, reacting to error indications and conditions requires that the oper-
ator must have special knowledge.





Monitoring functions
Instruction handbook b maXX BM3000, BM3200, BM3300
Document no. 5.11018.11 Baumüller Nürnberg GmbH
172
of 218
10.2
10.2 Monitoring functions
Monitoring function Warning/Error
Threshold 
settable
Warning
Warning
reaction
Error
Error 
reaction
Phase monitoring Phase failure - X
2)
X
2)
Power supply failure - X  - X
2)
Overcurrent Overcurrent motor - - - X IS
DC-link DC-link overvoltage  - - - X IS
DC-link undervoltage  - - - X
 
IS
Ixt-threshold  Peak current not possible, at present - X - - -
Temperature
heat sink
Temperature > threshold 1 X X - - -
Temperature > switch-off threshold - - - X IS
Temperature 
Internal space of device
Temperature > threshold 1 X X - - -
Temperature > switch-off threshold - - - X IS
Temperature 
motor 
I
2
t-threshold exceeded  - - - X IS 
1)
Threshold 1 exceeded 
4)
XX - - -
Threshold 2 exceeded 
4)
XX - - -
Short-circuit sensor / T < 30 °C 
4)
---XIS 
1)
Sensor is not connected / T > 250 °C 
4)
---XIS 
1)
Maximum temperature exceeded 
2)
X- -XIS 
1)
Position controller  Position deviation error, dynamic mode X - - X -
 Position deviation error, static mode X - - X -
Controller synchronization Controller not synchronous with external signal - X - X
1)
Encoder Overspeed X - - X IS 
3)
Cyclic set value transmis-
sion to the fieldbus
Time-out at transmission X - - X
1)
Block monitoring Drive blocked  - - - X IS
Signal bus Power supply ready - - - X
1)
1) 
Monitoring can be switched-off
2) 
Time/operation until pulse inhibit can be set
3) 
Threshold can be set 
4) 
Only, if a KTY/PT1000-sensor is used
IS: Pulse inhibit
X: implemented
-: not possible





Troubleshooting and Fault Correction
Instruction handbook b maXX BM3000, BM3200, BM3300
Document no. 5.11018.11 
173
of 218
10
10.2.1 Monitoring functions
Overcurrent This monitoring function checks, if the motor- or the power supply current is 1.3 times 
greater than the output peak current. It serves as a protection against an output-sided 
short-circuit.
DC-link This monitoring function checks the voltage in the DC-link. If the voltage falls under a 
fixed, internal value (about 210 V), then „DC link undervoltage“ is signaled from the con-
troller and a warning is displayed. If the voltage exceeds a fixed, internal value (about 
825 V) then “DC link overvoltage“ is signaled from the controller and an immediate pulse 
inhibit takes place.
Ixt-threshold This monitoring function checks the heat sink temperature and the current load, whether 
it can supply the peak current or the max. rated current, at the moment. If peak current is 
not possible, the message “Ixt-threshold 1 exceeded“ is displayed.
Temperature 
internal space of 
device
This monitoring function checks the temperature in the internal space of the device.
m If the temperature is greater than the warning threshold, the controller displays a warn-
ing.
m If the temperature is greater than the permitted temperature of the device‘s internal 
space, an error is generated, the error reaction can be set.
Temperature 
heat sink
This monitoring function checks the temperature of the heat sink.
m If the temperature is greater than the warning threshold, the controller displays a warn-
ing.
m If the temperature is greater than the maximum permitted heat sink temperature of the 
device‘s internal space, an error is generated, the error reaction can be set.
Temperature 
motor
This monitoring function checks the temperature of the motor. if the I²t-overload of the 
controller is displayed.
Only for
KTY84 and PT1000
sensor
If the set temperature threshold 1 is exceeded, then the warning „Temperature threshold 
1 exceeded“ is generated by the controller.
If the set temperature threshold 2 is exceeded, then the warning „Temperature threshold 
2 exceeded“ is generated by the controller.
If the temperature falls below the minimum measurable value, or if a short circuit occurs 
at the sensor, then the error message „Temperature sensor short circuit“ is generated.
If the temperature exceeds the maximum measurable temperature, or if the sensor is not 
connected, then the error message „Temperature sensor not connected“ is generated by 
the controller.
For all 
sensors
If the threshold set (type-specific) in the temperature switch or in the sensor is exceeded, 
then the error message „Over temperature“ is generated by the controller and the pulses 
are inhibited immediately.
Position 
controller
This monitoring function checks the position deviation limit statical/dynamical. 
The error message „position deviation statical“ or „position deviation dynamical“ is set, if 
the present position deviation statical/dynamical is greater than the set position deviation 
limit. After the monitoring time (deviation time) has past an additional error message is 
displayed and an immediate pulse inhibit takes place. The reaction time is settable.





Monitoring functions
Instruction handbook b maXX BM3000, BM3200, BM3300
Document no. 5.11018.11 Baumüller Nürnberg GmbH
174
of 218
10.2
Block monitoring This monitoring function checks the motor speed and the motor current. 
If both of the following conditions are met for the period „block monitoring time“, then the 
error/the warning „drive blocked“ is signaled to the controller and an immediate pulse in-
hibit takes place. 
m Motor speed = 0
m The motor current output from the device is the same as the set motor limit current (cur-
rent limit).
Signal bus  All power units at the axis devices are connected with a „signal bus“. Each user can re-
quest for and set the bus signals including the supply unit.
Signal bus - supply ready-for-use
Indicates, when the supply unit is in the status „ready-for-use“. This signal is generated 
after the recognition and identification of the power supply. At a power rectifier „ready-for-
use“ is active after about 4 s after switching on the 24 V-supply voltage.
At power supply errors and power supply failure the ready-for-use signal is reset. The 
axes must react upon this and must change into the error state. 
Signal bus - ballast resistor on
The DC-link voltage is monitored independently by each axis. The mode parameter 
(140.1) bit 0 sets, if the signal for the control of the ballast resistor shall be activated at 
this warning. If the voltage of the ballast resistor drops below the ballast resistor threshold 
(P130.29 protected) - 20 V (hysteresis) the axis resets the signal at the bus and deletes 
the warning.
The ballast resistor threshold is calculated from max. U
DC-link 
with:
Ballast resistor = max. U
DC-link 
 - 30 V





Troubleshooting and Fault Correction
Instruction handbook b maXX BM3000, BM3200, BM3300
Document no. 5.11018.11 
175
of 218
10
10.3 Error detection
An error state is signaled by the lighting-up of the red LED H14 on the front side of the 
cabinet; also see ZDisplay- and operating elements BM3200, BM3300– on page 58 on-
ward.
Further information according the subjects error messages and error numbers, see „pa-
rameter manual b maXX 3000“.
10.4 Troubleshooting/error acknowledge
The basis of troubleshooting are the error messages, which also are called error lists.
If the red error-LED H14 is flashing, then one error occurred, at least.
Th
e error messages are reset by executing an error acknowledge. An individual error ac-
knowledge is not possible. The acknowledge causes a reset of the error, if the reset is 
possible because of the error situation.
There are three methods to acknowledge errors:
m On
 the control word via write access.
m Via a dig
ital input
m Via the pu
lse enable input:
Precondition is, that the drive can be controlled via the hardware inputs only (this 
me
ans that the motor control cannot be set via another communication source). Fur-
thermore, the option „error acknowledge via pulse e
nable“ must be activated. The first 
rising edge of the pulse enable acknowledges the errors. However, the drive has not 
started, yet. A second rising edge is necessary for enabling.
Further information referring to the subject error acknowledge is found in „Parameter 
ma
nual b maXX 3000“.
NOTE!
At warnings or errors without error reaction the LED H14 „error“ flashes. Only error 
messages with error reactions are signaled by a constant lighting-up. 
NOTE!
The device is delivered with predefined error reactions. The error reaction of the de-
vice can be set in the marked error messages in „Dependent on setting“ in the column
„Reaction“. Errors, where an immediate pulse inhibit is executed cannot be changed, 
due to safety reasons.






Troubleshooting/error acknowledge
Instruction handbook b maXX BM3000, BM3200, BM3300
Document no. 5.11018.11 Baumüller Nürnberg GmbH
176
of 218
10.4





177
of 218
 Instruction handbook b maXX BM3000, BM3200, BM3300
Document no. 5.11018.11 
11ACCESSORIES AND SPARE PARTS 
In this appendix the accessory-/spare parts for the devices of the series BM3000, 
BM3200, BM3300 are listed. Do not hesitate to contact our product management for in-
quiries and suggestions referring to spare parts.
11.1 Cables
11.1.1 Cable power supply-device
1)
The length of the cable between mains filter and power supply, in order to comply with the EMC-Guideline, is irrelevant.
2)
The laying procedure is not specified. The DC link connections must be laid DC compliant.
Device Cross-section Maximum Length 
1)
Connection to the device 
2)
BM300X 1 mm² bis 4 mm² optional flexible cable with cable lug M4
Device Cross-section Maximum Length 
1)
Connection to the device 
2)
BM320X
BM330X
BM321X
BM331X
4 x 1 bis 2.5 mm
2
(AWG 18 - 14)
optional flexible cable
 with/without wire end ferrule
(screw contact)





Cables
Instruction handbook b maXX BM3000, BM3200, BM3300
Document no. 5.11018.11 Baumüller Nürnberg GmbH
178
of 218
11.1
11.1.2 Cable device-motor
Device Cross-section Maximum Length 
1) 
Connection at Device 
2)
BM320X
BM330X
BM321X
BM331X
4 x 1 to 4 mm
2
(AWG 28 - 12)
max. 50 m flexible cable 
with/witho
ut wire end ferrule
(screw contact)
1)
Only with a Baumüller cable with this maximum length and with a Baumüller mains filter it can be expected that the limit values of the 
EMC-product standard EN_61800-3 can be complied with. If n-parallel-laid motor cables are used, then the maximum length is to be 
reduced by the factor 1/n.
2)
With Baumüller cables with this maximum length and the use of Baumüller mains filters, it can be expected that the limit values of the 
EMC-regulation is complied with.
11.1.3 Hybrid cable device-encoder-motor
Selection The trailing cables are suitable for mobile deployment, for example in mobile cable han-
dlers. In addition, the cable sheath can be used in environments with acids and bases 
(e.g. coolant).
The encoder wires for DSL Hiperface
®
 encoders are connected with the device.
Cables pre-assembled - trailing 
type; CE UL/CSA, Halogen-free, Silicone-free, FCKW-free, 
RoHS compliant, additional lengths upon request.
Length
Hybrid cable motor DSL Hiperface
®
15 A
speedtec
®
 M23
Part No.
3 m 464201
5 m 464202
7 m 464203
10 m 464204
15 m 464205
20 m 464206
25 m 464207
30 m 464208
35 m 464209
40 m 464210
50 m 464211
60 m 464212





Accessories and Spare Parts
Instruction handbook b maXX BM3000, BM3200, BM3300
Document no. 5.11018.11 
179
of 218
11
m  Motor cable with DSL Hiperface
®
 15 A
Connect cable shield with the
housing of the connector.
Cable length
(according order)
Heat shrink tubing
400 mm
Data cable shielded
Connect the cable shielding
via the strain relief clamp
of the connector housing.
Pin 1
1
3
A
D
4
DSL- blue
DSL+ white
Pin 19 DSL-
Pin 20 DSL+
B+
B-
V
W
GN/GE
U

Figure 69: Motor cable with DSL Hiperface
®
 15 A
Cable: 4G1.5+(2x0,75)+(2x22AWG)
Shielding: copper wires, tinned
Motor side: 
Circular metal connector speedtec
®
 M23 8-pin
Connect outside shielding and inside shielding with the connector housing.
Device side: 
Metal D-sub connector 45°, 26-pin with electronics
Connect inside shielding with the connector housing.
Circular connector Type of stranding Unconnected wires Cross section of wire
1

U 1,5 mm² / black / U
3

V 1,5 mm² / black / V
4

W 1,5 mm² / black / W

GN/GE 1,5 mm² / green-yellow
A B+ 0,75 mm² / black
B B- 0,75 mm² / black
C DSL+ 22 AWG / white
D DSL- 22 AWG / blue
Housing - Outside shielding
Housing - Inside shielding





Cables
Instruction handbook b maXX BM3000, BM3200, BM3300
Document no. 5.11018.11 Baumüller Nürnberg GmbH
180
of 218
11.1
11.1.4 Cable DC-link
Device Cross-section Connection at Device
BM3X0X
BM3X1X
2 x 1 to 2.5 mm
2
(AWG 18 - 14)
flexible cable with/without wire end ferrule
(screw
 contact)
11.1.5 Cable control power supply / signals
Cross-section
 1)
1.5 mm
2
Maximum length (without digital IO) 
2)
optional
Maximum length digital IO 30 m
Connection at device Without/with wire end ferrules
(plug-in terminal
1) 
The laying procedure is not specified.
2) 
The length of the cable in order to comply with the EMC-regulation is irrelevant.
HINWEIS!
A ferrite core (part No. 308293) must be used with a DC link connection longer than 
3 m to ensure a reliable EMC interference immunity of the BM3000, BM3200, 
BM3300. The DC link cables connected with 1C1 and 1D1 must be led through the 
ferrite core with 3 turns per cable. The ferrite core should be close to the connection 
X205 of the BM3000, BM3200, BM3300.





Accessories and Spare Parts
Instruction handbook b maXX BM3000, BM3200, BM3300
Document no. 5.11018.11 
181
of 218
11
11.1.6 Cable signal bus
BM3XXX-XXXX-XXXXX[-X]-XXX1X
up to 12 devices can be connected
or 
BM3XXX-XXXX-XXXXX[-X]-XXX2X
up to 30 devices can be connected.
Part No.
Flat Cable Holder
Richco FCCS-2
430152
11.1.7 Cables - EtherCAT
®
, VARAN, POWERLINK
®
 .
m Eth
ernet-connection Cables, Type: Patch cable, STP
Type Length [mm] Part No.
K-ETH-33-0-0,5 0.5 325160
K-ETH-33-0-01 1 325161
K-ETH-33-0-02 2 325162
K-ETH-33-0-03 3 325163
K-ETH-33-0-04 4 325317
K-ETH-33-0-05 5 325164
K-ETH-33-0-10 10 325165
other lengths on request
NOTE!
The
 signal bus cables are not included in the delivery scope and must be ordered 
separately.
Type Part No.
Signal bus cable 10-pin BM320X, BM330X 426781
Signal bus cable 10-pin BM321X, BM331X 426782
NOTE!
Dependent on the type of the used device





Cables
Instruction handbook b maXX BM3000, BM3200, BM3300
Document no. 5.11018.11 Baumüller Nürnberg GmbH
182
of 218
11.1
11.1.8 Accessories - CANopen
®
.
m CANopen
®
-connection cables:
Type Model Length [m] Part No.
BM4-CAN-K-31-01 RJ45-plug, 
sub D male
1 346568
BM4-CAN-K-31-02 2 on request
BM4-CAN-K-31-03 3 346571
BM4-CAN-K-31-05 5 on request
BM4-CAN-K-31-10 10 on request
BM4-CAN-K-32-01 RJ45-plug, 
sub D female
1 346572
BM4-CAN-K-32-02 2 on request
BM4-CAN-K-32-03 3 346573
BM4-CAN-K-32-05 5 on request
BM4-CAN-K-32-10 10 on request
BM4-CAN-K-33-01 RJ45-plug, 
RJ45-plug
1 346577
BM4-CAN-K-33-02 2 on request
BM4-CAN-K-33-03 3 on request
BM4-CAN-K-33-05 5 on request
BM4-CAN-K-33-10 10 on request
m Terminating terminal RJ45 
(Terminating terminal CAN, RJ45 with pin a
ssignment according to CIA-standard, 
120 
, 0.25 W)
Type Part No.
BM4-CAN-T01 346408
11.1.9 Cable service interface
Type Length [m]  Part No.
BM5-K-USB-018 1.8 430279
Interface on side of PC: USB 2.0
Driver installation: is executed with the installation of ProDrive
Maximum transmission rate 920 kBaud





Accessories and Spare Parts
Instruction handbook b maXX BM3000, BM3200, BM3300
Document no. 5.11018.11 
183
of 218
11
11.1.10 Encoder cables
Selection of the 
encoder cables
The trailing cables are suitable for mobile deployment, for example in mobile cable han-
dlers. In addition, the cable sheath can be used in environments with acids and bases 
(e.g. coolant).
With servo motors using the Resolver encoder system, the temperature sensor is con-
nected to the device via the encoder cable. Additional technical data, connector assign-
ments, application notes and Part numbers can be found in the motor documentation.
Cables pre-assembled - trailing type; CE UL/CSA, Halogen-free, according to IEC 60754-1, Sili-
cone-free, FCKW-free, RoHS compliant, additional lengths upon request.
Length
Resolver Encoder with 
HIPERFACE
®
Sine-/square wave 
incremental encoder
Part No. Part No. Part No.
speedtec
®
speedtec
®
speedtec
®
1 m 429914 448746 429958 448761 430015 448777
2 m 429915 448747 429959 448762 430016 448778
3 m 429916 448748 429960 448763 430017 448779
5 m 429917 448749 429961 448764 430018 448780
7 m 429918 448750 429962 448765 430019 448781
10 m 429919 448751 429963 448766 430020 448782
15 m 429920 448752 429964 448767 430021 448783
20 m 429921 448753 429965 448768 430022 448784
25 m 429922 448754 429966 448769 430023 448785
30 m 429923 448755 429967 448770 430024 448786
35 m 429924 448756 429968 448772 430025 448787
40 m 429925 448757 429969 448773 430026 448788
50 m 429926 448758 429970 448774 430027 448789
75 m 429927 448759 429971 448775 430028 448790





Cables
Instruction handbook b maXX BM3000, BM3200, BM3300
Document no. 5.11018.11 Baumüller Nürnberg GmbH
184
of 218
11.1
Length
Encoder with 
EnDat
®
/SSI
Encoder with 
EnDat
®
 2.2
Encoder with 
HIPERFACE DSL
®
Part No. Part No. see ZHybrid cable 
device-encoder-motor– 
on page 178
speedtec
®
M12
speedtec
®
M23
1 m 429986 448796 458805 465906
2 m 429987 448797 458806 465907
3 m 429988 448798 458807 465908
5 m 429989 448799 458808 465909
7 m 429990 448800 458809 465910
10 m 429991 448801 458810 465911
15 m 429992 448802 458811 465912
20 m 429993 448803 458812 465913
25 m 429994 448804 458813 465914
30 m 429995 448805 458814 465915
35 m 429996 448806 458815 465916
40 m 429997 448807 458816 465917
50 m 429998 448808 458817 465918
75 m 429999 448809 458818 465919








Accessories and Spare Parts
Instruction handbook b maXX BM3000, BM3200, BM3300
Document no. 5.11018.11 
185
of 218
11
11.1.10.1 Connecting cable for Resolver
The connecting cable is available as accessory part from Baumüller Nürnberg GmbH.
Follow the instructions below if a self-made cable is to be used:
1 Utilize the following materials:
m Cable: Li9YC 1x2x0.25-Li9Y 2x2x0,25-Li9Y C11Y 1x2x0.34GN.
m High-density D-sub connector: 26-pin, male
m Round connector: 12-pin, female (e.g. from Interconnectron)
2 Fully adjoin the cable shield with the housing of the round connector and with the 
shielding of the D-sub connector.
Figure 70: Connecting cable for resolver
NOTE
The connecting cable must be made according to the figure shown above! 
If there is a different pin assignment, the cable is not operable and could lead to de-
fects, both in the encoder module and the encoder!





Cables
Instruction handbook b maXX BM3000, BM3200, BM3300
Document no. 5.11018.11 Baumüller Nürnberg GmbH
186
of 218
11.1
11.1.10.2 Connecting cable for encoder with HIPERFACE
®
 .
The connecting cable is available as accessory part from Baumüller Nürnberg GmbH.
Follow the instructions below if a self-made cable is to be used:
1 Utilize the following materials:
m Cable: Li9YC3x2x0.25-Li9Y3x2x0,25-Li9Y C11Y 1x2x0.34GN. Two cable pairs are 
not needed and also not connected.
m High-density D-sub connector: 26-pin, male
m Round connector: 12-pin, female (e.g. from Interconnectron)
2 Fully adjoin the cable shield with the housing of the round connector and with the 
shielding of the D-sub connector.
Figure 71: Connecting cable for encoder with HIPERFACE
®
 
5000_1102_rev01_int.cdr
2
1
4
5
6
19
20
17
18
7
12
10
8
1
5
2
7
3
4
6
Æ 0.34 mm
Æ 0.34 mm

NOTE
The connecting cable must be made according to the figure shown above! 
If there is a different pin assignment, the cable is not operable and could lead to de-
fects, both in the encoder module and the encoder!





Accessories and Spare Parts
Instruction handbook b maXX BM3000, BM3200, BM3300
Document no. 5.11018.11 
187
of 218
11
11.1.10.3 Connecting cable for encoder with EnDat
®
 or SSI
The connecting cable is available as accessory part from Baumüller Nürnberg GmbH.
Follow the instructions below if a self-made cable is to be used:
1 Utilize the following materials:
m Cable: Li9YC3x2x0.25-Li9Y3x2x0,25-Li9Y C11Y 1x2x0.34GN. Two cable pairs are 
not needed and also not connected.
m High-density D-sub connector: 26-pin, male
m Round connector: 17-pin, female (e.g. from Interconnectron)
2 Fully adjoin the cable shield with the housing of the round connector and with the 
shielding of the D-sub connector.
Figure 72: Connecting cable for encoder with EnDat
®
 or SSI
NOTE
The connecting cable must be made according to the figure shown above! 
If there is a different pin assignment, the cable is not functionally operable and could 
lead to defects, both in the encoder module and the encoder!





Cables
Instruction handbook b maXX BM3000, BM3200, BM3300
Document no. 5.11018.11 Baumüller Nürnberg GmbH
188
of 218
11.1
11.1.10.4 Connecting cable for encoder with EnDat
®
 2.2
The connecting cable is available as accessory part with M12 or speedtec
® 
M23 from 
Baumüller Nürnberg GmbH.
M12 Follow the instructions below if a self-made cable with M12 is to be used:
1 Utilize the following materials:
m Cable: 4 x 0,38 + 1 x (4 x 0,14)
m High-density D-sub connector: 26-pin, male
m Round connector: 8-pin M12, female (e.g. from Interconnectron)
2 Fully adjoin the cable shield with the housing of the round connector and with the 
shielding of the D-sub connector.
Figure 73: Connecting cable for encoder with EnDat
®
 2.2 M12
NOTE
The connecting cable must be made according to the figure shown above! 
If there is a different pin assignment, the cable is not functionally operable and could 
lead to defects, both in the encoder module and the encoder!





Accessories and Spare Parts
Instruction handbook b maXX BM3000, BM3200, BM3300
Document no. 5.11018.11 
189
of 218
11
speedtec
® 
M23 Follow the instructions below if a self-made cable with speedtec
® 
M23 is to be used:
1 Utilize the following materials:
m Cable: 4 x 0,38 + 1 x (4 x 0,14)
m High-density D-sub connector: 26-pin, male
m Round connector: 9-pin speedtec
®
 M23, female (Intercontec)
2 Fully adjoin the cable shield with the housing of the round connector and with the 
shielding of the D-sub connector.
Figure 74: Connecting cable for encoder with EnDat
®
 2.2 speedtec
®
 M23
NOTE
The connecting cable must be made according to the figure shown above! 
If there is a different pin assignment, the cable is not functionally operable and could 
lead to defects, both in the encoder module and the encoder!





Cables
Instruction handbook b maXX BM3000, BM3200, BM3300
Document no. 5.11018.11 Baumüller Nürnberg GmbH
190
of 218
11.1
11.1.10.5 Connecting cable for sine/square-wave incremental encoder
The connecting cable is available as accessory part from Baumüller Nürnberg GmbH.
Follow the instructions below if a self-made cable is to be used:
1 Utilize the following materials:
m Cable: Li9YC3x2x0.25-Li9Y3x2x0,25-Li9Y C11Y 1x2x0.34GN. Two cable pairs are 
not needed and also not connected.
m High-density D-sub connector: 26-pin, male
m Round connector: 12-pin, female (e.g. from Interconnectron)
2 Fully adjoin the cable shield with the housing of the round connector and with the 
shielding of the D-sub connector.
Figure 75: Connecting cable for sine/square wave incremental encoder
5000_1103_rev01_int.cdr
2
1
4
5
6
8
9
12
11
17
18
7
12
10
5
6
8
3
4
2
11
7
9
1
Æ 0.34 mm
Æ 0.34 mm

NOTE
The connecting cable must be made according to the figure shown above! 
If there is a different pin assignment, the cable is not functionally operable and could 
lead to defects, both in the encoder module and the encoder!





Accessories and Spare Parts
Instruction handbook b maXX BM3000, BM3200, BM3300
Document no. 5.11018.11 
191
of 218
11
11.2 Fuses
There is a difference between the protection of the power supply cables and the protec-
tion of the device. Operate the device BM3000, BM3200, BM3300 with cable protection 
and device protection fuses, only.
11.2.1 Cable protection
Use fuses of utilization category gL DIN VDE 0636-201 / IEC 60269-2-1 / HD 630.2.1 54 
or circuit-breaker tripping characteristic K according to DIN VDE 0636-201 / IEC 60269-
2-1 / HD 630.2.1 54, to protect the cable. These fuses protect against overloads and the 
consequential damages of faults e. g fire. They cannot avoid, that the device is extensive-
ly destructed by a short-circuit or by a ground fault in the DC-link.
Execute protection compliant with EN 60204-1 („Electrical Equipment of Machines“). Di-
mension the fuses dependent of the used interface of the power supply cable according 
to the accordantly valid national standard and the local regulations.
The current carrying capacity of fuses is defined in the table 5 of the EN60204-1. The ac-
cording value must be calculated self in the standard, in order to use it. Here is an extract
Use suitable fuses with a tripping characteristic gL.
11.2.2 Device protection
Use semiconductor fuses with the tripping characteristic aR (DIN VDE 0636-201 / IEC 
60269-2-1 / HD 630.2.1 54). Connect in series to the cable protection fuse. They protect 
the input-sided rectifier circuit in case of a short-circuit against complete destruction, mak-
ing a repair of the device necessary.
Dimension the device protection fuses dependent on the peak current and the required 
I
2
t value.
1) 
Use fuses, which switch off I
2
t value is below the maximum load I
2
t value of the device.
NOTE!
Approved, UL-listed safety fuses must be used in UL-authorized systems, refer to 
ZUL notes– from page 55.
Cable interface Rated fuse current
1.5 mm
2
16.1 A
2.5 mm
2
22 A
Device Maximum load I
2
t value 
1)
BM30XX:  365 A
2
s
BM32XX, BM33XX 200 A
2
s






Fuses
Instruction handbook b maXX BM3000, BM3200, BM3300
Document no. 5.11018.11 Baumüller Nürnberg GmbH
192
of 218
11.2
11.2.3 Cable protection and device protection
There are two possibilities to protect the cable and the device:
m Ca
ble protection fuses and semiconductor fuses, which are connected in series
m Use 
all-range fuses with a tripping characteristic gR or gS (DIN VDE 0636-201 / IEC 
60269-2-1 / HD 630.2.1 54).
The suitable cable and device protection fu
ses must be dimensioned dependent on the 
interface of the used power supply cable, the peak current and of the required I
2
t
off
 in 
ZDevice protection– on page 191.
In contrast to the fuses, the devices and cables can be protected with listed „Circuit break-
ers“ complying to UL (DIVQ). 
Permitted are circuit breakers without a tripping delay, only. Circuit breakers with only a 
thermal tripping characteristic are not tested and therefore not permitted. It must be con-
sidered that the installation is protected against fire but not against destruction.
Dimension the circuit breaker dependent on the interface of the used power supply cable 
as well as from the rated and the peak current of the devices.
BM3002
Producer Device protection Device protection and cable protection
Siemens 3NE8 003-1: 35A/690V, NH00, gR 
3NE8 702-1: 40A/690V, NH000 gR
Producer Device protection Device protection and cable protection
SIBA 60 033 05 16A (10 x 38 mm) aR 20 477 34 16A (NH000) gRL gS
20 209 34 16A (NH00) gRL gS
50 124 34 16A (14 x 51 mm) gRL gS
Bussmann FWP-20A14F 20A 700V 14x51mm aR 170M1560D 20A 690V NH000 gR
DFJ-15 (21 x 57 mm) Class J
Mersen 
(former Ferraz)
NH000GS69V32PV Ref:X322043C 
(NH000) 32A 690V gS
FR10GR69V20 Ref: E1014580
(10 x 38 mm) 20A 690V gR
FR22GC69V25 Ref: B220916
(22 x 58 mm) 25A 690V gRC
HSJ15 (21 x 57 mm) Class J
Siemens 3NC1415: 15A/690V, (14 x 51 mm) aR
3NC1016: 16A/600V, (10 x 38 mm) aR
3NE1813-0: 16A/690V, NH000 gS   
3NE8015-1: 25A/690V, NH00 gR






Accessories and Spare Parts
Instruction handbook b maXX BM3000, BM3200, BM3300
Document no. 5.11018.11 
193
of 218
11
11.3 Mains filter
Mains filters are combinations of capacitors, reactors, resistors and voltage limiters, 
which shall reduce the electromagnetic influence of environment. Further information see 
Mains filter, 5.09010.
11.3.1 Required 
Transport temperature range -25 °C up to +85 °C
Storage temperature range - 25 °C up to +85 °C
Operation environment industry power supply
Operation temperature range -25 °C up to +85 °C
environmental conditions mains filter
11.3.2 Mains filter for 3-phase devices BM3XXX-XTXX
m Block diagram of filter for mains applications (simplified)
Figure 76: Block diagram mains filter
m Selection of the correct mains filter for 3-phase devices
In dependency of the application install a ma
ins filter from the following table:
I
rated AC 
1)
Type Part No.  Use with devices 
5 A BFN 3-1-0007-001 314277 BM320X-XTXX, BM330X-XTXX
10 A BFN 3-1-0016-001 314278 BM321X-XTXX, BM331X-XTXX
20 A HOWCORE NFI-020 464082 BM3002
30 A BFN 3-1 - 0030 - 001 314279
75 A BFN 3-1 - 0075 - 001 314282





Mains filter
Instruction handbook b maXX BM3000, BM3200, BM3300
Document no. 5.11018.11 Baumüller Nürnberg GmbH
194
of 218
11.3
m Electrical data mains filter for 3-phase devices
BFN 3-1-... -001 0007 0016 0030 0042 0056 0075 HOWCORE 
NF
I-020
Max. supply voltage
3 x 480 V
AC
 +10 %, 50/60 Hz
Rated current (at T
B
 = 40 °C)
7,6 A 17,5 A 33 A 46 A 70 A 82 A 20 A
Rated current (at T
B
 = 50 °C)
7 A 16 A 30 A 42 A 56 A 75 A
Peak current  1.5 x I
N
 for < 1 min per hour
Max. voltage
phase conductor/ground
neutral point /ground
305 V
AC
0 V
Max. test voltage at 25 °C 
phase / phase 
phase / ground
2,1 kV
DC 
for 2 s
2,7 kV
DC 
for 2 s
2,1 kV
DC 
for 2 s
Maximum conductor 
cross sections
4 
mm
²
4 
mm²
10 
mm²
10 
mm²
16 
mm²
25 
mm²
Power loss (typical)
4 W 8
 W 12  W 15 W 18 W 24 W
Harmonics
(power supply voltage)
THD
U
 < 10 %
Type of protection
IP 20
Weight
0,6 kg 1,0 kg 1,3 kg 1,6 kg 1,9 kg 2,6 kg
DANGER!
Risk of fatal injury from high leakage current!
Therefore:
m Cross-section of the PE conductor see ZPE connections BM3200, BM3300 rear 
panel– on page 145 (EN 61800-5-1, chapter 4.3.5.5.2).
NOTE!
The rated current of the used filters must be greater or the same RMS value of the 
actual power supply current (actual power supply current = RMS value of the power 
supply current during the total cycle time of the drive). At short-time operation (S3) 
the RMS value is calculated as follows:
I
eff
1
T
---
i
2
0
T

dt=








Accessories and Spare Parts
Instruction handbook b maXX BM3000, BM3200, BM3300
Document no. 5.11018.11 
195
of 218
11
11.3.3 Mains filter for 1-phase devices BM3XXX-XEXX
m Selection of the correct mains filter for 1-phase devices
In dependency of the application install a ma
ins filter from the following table:
m Elect
rical data mains filter for 1-phase devices
LGF mains filter FFU 1X12
B-SB02
Max. supply voltage 1 x 250 V
AC
, 120 Hz
Rated current (at T
B
 = 40 °C) 12 A
Peak current (at T
B
 = 40 °C) 1.5 x I
N
 for < 1 min per hour
Max. test voltage
for 2 s at 25 °C
phase / phase: 1.7 kV
DC
phase / housing: 2.7 kV
DC
Maximum conductor cross 
sections
4 mm
2
 fine wire
6 mm
2
 rigid wire
Leakage power (typical) 9 W
Ground current typical 7 mA, at 250 V/50 Hz
Type of protection IP 20
Weight 0.6 kg
I
Bem AC 
1)
Type Part No.  Use with devices 
12 A LGF mains filter
FFU 1X12B-SB02
463472 BM32XX-XEXX
BM33XX-XEXX
DANGER!
Risk of fatal injury from high leakage current!
Therefore:
m Cross-section of the PE conductor see ZPE connections BM3200, BM3300 rear 
panel– on page 145 (EN 61800-5-1, chapter 4.3.5.5.2).
NOTE!
The rated current of the used filters must be greater or the same RMS value of the 
actual power supply current (actual power supply current = RMS value of the power 
supply current during the total cycle time of the drive). At short-time operation (S3) 
the RMS value is calculated as follows:
I
eff
1
T
---
i
2
0
T

dt=








Spare parts
Instruction handbook b maXX BM3000, BM3200, BM3300
Document no. 5.11018.11 Baumüller Nürnberg GmbH
196
of 218
11.4
11.4 Spare parts
11.4.1 Connectors BM3200, BM3300
Part No.
Connector DIO X2
Weidmüller B2L 3.5, 1727710000
315518
Connector STO X102
Weidmüller BLZF 3.50/05/180
424601
Connector motor X107
Weidmüller BLZ 7.62IT/03/180MF2
436300
Connector X200
Wago 231-2302
417197
BM3XXX-XTXX-XXXXX-B-XXXXX-
Connector power supply X202
Weidmüller BLZ 7.62IT/03/180MF3
436298
BM3XXX-XTXX-XXXXX-B-XXXXX-
Connector DC link X205
Weidmüller BLZ 7.62IT/02/180MF2
436294
BM3XXX-XE
Connector power supply X202
Weidmüller BVF 7.62HP/02/180MF2
449452
BM3XXX-XE
Connector DC link, ballast resistor X205
Weidmüller BLZ 7.62IT/03/180MF2
436300
BM3XXX-XTXX-XXXXX-E-XXXXX-
Connector power supply, DC link, ballast resistor X203
Weidmüller BLZ 7.62IT/06/180MF6
456880
Connector motor temperature X101
Weidmüller BLZ 3.50/02/180
441062





Accessories and Spare Parts
Instruction handbook b maXX BM3000, BM3200, BM3300
Document no. 5.11018.11 
197
of 218
11
11.4.2 Accessories kit shielding BM3200, BM3300
Part No.
BM3200, BM3300 Cable shield grounding clamp 24 mm width 437738
Cable shield grounding clamp 17 mm width 437736
11.4.3 Accessories kit protection cover BM3000
Part No.
BM3000 Accessories kit protection cover 473838
NOTE!
Optional, not included in delivery!
NOTE!
Optional, not included in BM300 delivery!





Spare parts
Instruction handbook b maXX BM3000, BM3200, BM3300
Document no. 5.11018.11 Baumüller Nürnberg GmbH
198
of 218
11.4





199
of 218
 Instruction handbook b maXX BM3000, BM3200, BM3300
Document no. 5.11018.11 
12SHUTDOWN, STORAGE
In this chapter we describe, how you decommission and store the device.
12.1 Safety instructions
h Refer to ZSafety– from page 11 and the information in ZTransport and Packaging– 
from page 71.
The shutdown of the device may only be carried out by for this qualified personnel.
DANGER!
Risk of fatal injury from electrical current!
Stored electric charge.
Discharge time of the system = discharge time of the device with the longest DC link 
discharge time.
Therefore:
m Do not touch electrically live parts before taking into account the discharge time of 
the capacitors.
m Assure, that all electric connections are current-free and are safe against switch-
on.
m Before working, check at the electrical connections with suitable measuring devic-
es, that the connections are off-circuit.
m Remove the connections not until the safe isolation from supply has been checked.
m If additional capacitors are connected to the DC link, the DC link discharge can 
take a much longer time. In this case, the necessary waiting period must itself be 
determined or a measurement made as to whether the equipment is de-energized. 
This discharge time must be posted, together with an IEC 60417-5036 (2002-10) 
warning symbol, on a clearly visible location of the control cabinet.








Requirements to the executing personnel
Instruction handbook b maXX BM3000, BM3200, BM3300
Document no. 5.11018.11 Baumüller Nürnberg GmbH
200
of 218
12.2
12.2 Requirements to the executing personnel
The personnel, who is appointed to setting out of operation, must have the required 
knowledge and instructions, which is necessary for an execution according to the rules. 
Select the personnel in such a way, that the safety instructions, which are mounted to the 
device and its parts as well as to the connections, are understood and applied to.
12.3 Shutdown
Execute the setting out of operation as follows:
1 p
ut the device off-circuit and assure the device against unintentional restart.
2 ch
eck the isolation from supply of all connections (earliest 10 minutes after switching 
off).
3 de
mount the connections and protect the connections according to the safety instruc-
tions. 
4 d
ocument the shut down setting.
12.4 Demounting
m Ensure that only qualified personnel, who are familiar with the safety notes and as-
sembly instructions, demount
 this device.
mWear safety
 shoes.
The demounting assumes a completed, docum
ented setting out of operation.
1 sec
ure the device against falling off/out.
2 l
oosen all mechanical connections.
3 l
ift the device out of the control cabinet.
4 stor
e the device in a suitable packing.
5 a
t transportation pay attention to, that the device is not damaged by wrong storage or 
severe shocks, also see ZWh
at to observe when transporting– on page 71.
NOTICE!
No
te sharp edges.
In case, while installing, you lift a device with unprotected hands, fingers/palm can be 
cut. If the device falls off, your feet can be cut up.
Therefore:
Wear safety gloves.






Shutdown, Storage
Instruction handbook b maXX BM3000, BM3200, BM3300
Document no. 5.11018.11 
201
of 218
12
In case you want to dispose the device, additional data is available in chapter ZDisposal– 
from page 203.
12.5 Storage conditions
The device is maintenance-free. If you keep to the environmental conditions during the 
entire period of storage, you can assume, that the device will not be damaged. In case 
the environmental conditions during storage are not kept, you should assume that the de-
vice is damaged after storage.
CAUTION!
Property damage because of incorrect storage conditions
Incorrect storage can damage/destroy the device.
Therefore:
Assure, that the environmental conditions are kept during the entire period of storage:
m Climatic category 1K4 
m Temperature range -25 °C to +55 °C
CAUTION!
Recommissioning without forming of the capacitors. 
From six months storage period on, the capacitors are destroyed during commission-
ing, if they are not formed beforehand
m Reform the DC link capacitors:
n by supplying the device ready-to-operate for at least one hour with supply volt-
age
n but do not transmit a pulse enable during this time.
m Consider, that it is imperative, to connect the accordingly prescribed line commu-
tating reactor for this forming procedure. Devices, where no line commutating re-
actor is necessary can directly be supplied with power supply voltage.







Recommissioning
Instruction handbook b maXX BM3000, BM3200, BM3300
Document no. 5.11018.11 Baumüller Nürnberg GmbH
202
of 218
12.6
12.6 Recommissioning
Execute commissioning as with a new device, see 
ZMounting– from page 73, ZInstallation– from page 85.
.
CAUTION!
Recommissioning without forming of the capacitors. 
From six months storage period on, the capacitors are destroyed during commission-
ing, if they are not formed beforehand
m Reform the DC link capacitors:
n by supplying the device ready-to-operate for at least one hour with 
supply voltage
n but do not transmit a pulse enable during this time.
m Consider, that it is imperative, to connect the accordingly prescribed line commu-
tating reactor for this forming procedure. Devices, where no line commutating re-
actor is necessary can directly be supplied with power supply voltage.







203
of 218
 Instruction handbook b maXX BM3000, BM3200, BM3300
Document no. 5.11018.11 
13DISPOSAL
13.1 Safety regulations
NOTE!
Baumüller products are not subject to the scope of the EU’s Waste Electrical and 
Electronic Equipment Directive (WEEE, 2012/19/EU). Hence, Baumüller is not obli-
gated to bear costs for return and disposal of waste electronic equipment.
DANGER!
Risk of fatal injury from electrical current!
Stored electric charge.
Discharge time of the modular system = discharge time of the device with the longest 
DC link discharge time in the modular system.
Refer to ZElectrical data– from page 35.
Therefore:
m Do not touch before taking into account the discharge time of the capacitors and 
electrically live parts.
m Heed corresponding notes on the equipment.
m If several devices are connected e.g. with a mains rectifier unit, the DC link dis-
charge can take a much longer time. In this case, the necessary waiting period 
must itself be determined or a measurement made to ensure the device is de-en-
ergized. This discharge time must be posted, together with an IEC 60417-5036 
(2002-10) warning symbol, on a clearly visible location of the control cabinet.






Safety regulations
Instruction handbook b maXX BM3000, BM3200, BM3300
Document no. 5.11018.11 Baumüller Nürnberg GmbH
204
of 218
13.1
CAUTION!
Danger due to sharp edges.
If the device is lifted with unprotected hands during deinstallation, palms or fingers 
can be cut. If the device falls, feet could be injured.
Therefore:
m Ensure that only qualified personnel, who are familiar with the safety notes and as-
sembly instructions, mount this device.
Wear safety gloves.
Wear safety shoes.
WARNING!
Danger of physical impact!
Secure device against falling down.
Therefore:
m Take suitable measures, such as supports, hoists and assisting personnel, to en-
sure that device cannot fall down.
m Use appropriate means of transport.
NOTICE!
Avoid polluting the environment as a result of improper disposal.
Therefore:
m Only dispose in compliance with the health and safety regulations.
m Take heed of any special local regulations. If you are unable to directly ensure safe 
disposal yourself, commission a suitable disposal contractor.
m
In the event of a fire, hazardous substances could possibly be generated or re-
leased.
m Do not expose electronic components to high temperatures.
m Beryllium oxide is used as inner insulation, for example for various power semicon-
ductors. The beryllium dust that is generated upon opening is injurious to the 
health.

Do not open electronic components.
m Dispose of capacitors, semiconductor modules and electronic scrap as special 
waste.





Disposal
Instruction handbook b maXX BM3000, BM3200, BM3300
Document no. 5.11018.11 
205
of 218
13
13.2 Disposal facilities/authorities
Ensure that the disposal is handled in compliance with the disposal policies of your com-
pany, as well as with all national regulations of the responsible disposal facilities and au-
thorities. In case of doubt, consult the bureau of commerce or environmental protection 
authority responsible for your company.
WARNING!
Danger as a result of faulty demounting!
The demounting and disposal requires qualified personnel with adequate experience.
Therefore:
m Only allow demounting and disposal to be performed by qualified personnel.





Disposal facilities/authorities
Instruction handbook b maXX BM3000, BM3200, BM3300
Document no. 5.11018.11 Baumüller Nürnberg GmbH
206
of 218
13.2





207
of 218 
Instruction handbook b maXX BM3000, BM3200, BM3300
Document no. 5.11018.11 
APPENDIX A - ABBREVIATIONS
AC Alternating current
BB Ready-to-operate
CE Compliant with the directives of the 
European Union
DC Direct current
DIN Deutsches Institut für Normung 
e.V (German National Standards 
Institute). 
EMC Electromagnetic compatibility
EMVG European EMC law
EN European standard
ESD Electrostatic discharge
ext External
GND Ground
Î Peak current
I
AC
RMS-value of alternating current
I
DC
RMS-value of direct current
IEC International Electrotechnical 
Commission
IP Ingress protection; protection rat-
ing
IS Pulse inhibit
Chap. Chapter
K
G
Cooling air requirement of device 
interior
K
LK
Cooling air requirement of passive 
cooling unit
MSKL Motor protection thermistor
n = 0 Rotational speed = 0
n
ist
Rotational speed actual value
n
max
Maximum rotational speed
n
min
Minimum rotational speed
MSL Height above mean sea level
n
soll
Rotational speed set value
NTC Negative temperature coefficient 
thermistor
PE Protected ground
ground conductor connection
PELV Protective extra-low voltage, with 
safe isolation, grounded
PLL Phase Locked Loop
ppm Parts per million
PTC Positive temperature coefficient 
thermistor
R
B
Ballast Resistor
RCD Residual current protective device 
/ ground fault circuit breaker
SELV Safety extra-low voltage, with safe 
isolation
SH Quick stop
STO Safe Torque Off
Tab. Table
U Voltage
Û Peak voltage
U
AC
RMS-value, AC voltage
U
DC
RMS-value, DC voltage
UL Underwriters Laboratories
U
DC link
DC link voltage
VDE Verband der Elektrotechnik, Elek-
tronik und Informationstechnik 
(German electrical engineering, 
electronics and IT association)
ZK DC link





Instruction handbook b maXX BM3000, BM3200, BM3300
Document no. 5.11018.11 Baumüller Nürnberg GmbH
208
of 218
A





209
of 218 
Instruction handbook b maXX BM3000, BM3200, BM3300
Document no. 5.11018.11 
APPENDIX B - DECLARATION OF 
CONFORMITY





Instruction handbook b maXX BM3000, BM3200, BM3300
Document no. 5.11018.11 Baumüller Nürnberg GmbH
210
of 218
EU - Declaration of Conformity Doc.-No: 5.12061.03
Date: 14-Jun-2016
according to EMC Directive 2014/30/EU and 
Low Voltage Directive 2014/35/EU
The Manufacturer: Baumüller Nürnberg GmbH
Ostendstraße 80-90
90482 Nuremberg, Deutschland
declares that the product:
Name: Compact Servo Unit b maXX 3000 
Type: BM3201, BM3202, BM3203, BM3204, BM3211, BM3212, BM3213
manufactured since: 01-Nov-2012
was developed, designed and manufactured in accordance with the EMC Directive 2014/30/EU and the Low Voltage Di-
rective 2014/35/EU.
Applied harmonized standards:
Attention must be paid to the safety instructions in the manual.
Nuremberg / 14-Jun-2016
Location / Date
The content of the Declaration of Conformity is subject to change. The current version can be obtained on request.
Standard Title
DIN EN 62061:2010-05 Safety of Machinery - Functional safety of safety-related electrical, electronic and programmable 
electronic control systems
DIN EN 61800-5-1:2008-04 Variable-speed electrical power drives- 
Part 5-1: Safety requirements - Electrical, thermal and energy
DIN EN 61800-5-2:2008-04 Variable-speed electrical power drives
Part 5-2 Safety requirements - Functional
DIN EN 61800-3:2012-09 Variable-speed electrical power drives
Part 3: EMC-requirements and specific test methods






EC - Declaration of Conformity Doc.-No: 5.12060.03
Date: 14-Jun-2016
according to Machinery Directive 2006/42/EC
The Manufacturer: Baumüller Nürnberg GmbH
Ostendstraße 80-90
90482 Nürnberg, Germany
declares, that the products:
Designation: Compact Servo Unit b maXX 3000 with safety relay 
Type: BM3301-ST20, BM3302-ST20, BM3302-ST20, BM3304-ST20, 
BM3311-ST20, BM3312-ST20, BM3313-ST20
manufactured since: 22-Oct-2013
are developed, designed and manufactured in accordance with the Machinery Directive 2006/42/EC. These products com-
ply with the requirements of the EMC Directive 2014/30/EU and the Low Voltage Directive 2014/35/EU.
Applied harmonized standards:
 
Authorized person to compile the technical files: 
Name: Engelbert Meier, Baumüller Nürnberg GmbH, Section AES
Address: Ostendstraße 80-90, 90482 Nürnberg, Germany
Notified body executed the EC type-examination procedures according to Machinery Directive 2006/42/EC:
Name: TÜV Rheinland Industrie Service GmbH 
Address: Am Grauen Stein, 51105 Köln / Germany
Identification number: 0035
Registration numbers: 01/205/5354.00/13
Attention should be paid to the safety instructions in the manual.
This product is to be used in machinery and must not put into operation until the machinery, into with it is incorporated, has been declared 
to be in conformity with the Machinery Directive 2006/42/EC.
Nuremberg / 14-Jun-2016
Location / Date
Subject to change of this declaration of EC conformity without notice. Actual valid edition on request.
Norm Title
EN 62061:2016-05 Safety of machinery - Functional safety of safety-related electrical, electronic and programmable electronic 
control systems
EN ISO 13849-1:2008
AC: 2009
Safety of machinery - Safety-related parts of control systems, 
Part 1: General principles for design
EN 61800-5-1:
2008-04
Adjustable speed electrical power drive systems. Part 5-1: Safety requirements. Electrical, thermal and energy
EN 61800-5-2:2007 Adjustable speed electrical power drive systems. Part 5-2: Safety requirements. Functional
EN 60204-1:2006
A1:2009
Electrical equipment of machines Part 1:General requirements
EN 61800-3:2012-09 Adjustable speed electrical power drive systems. Part 3: EMC requirements and specific test methods
IEC 61508, 
Teil 1-7:2010
Functional safety of safety-related electrical, electronic and programmable electronic control systems

Declaration of Conformity
Instruction handbook b maXX BM3000, BM3200, BM3300
Document no. 5.11018.11
211
of 218
B





Instruction handbook b maXX BM3000, BM3200, BM3300
Document no. 5.11018.11 Baumüller Nürnberg GmbH
212
of 218





Instruction handbook b maXX BM3000, BM3200, BM3300
Document no. 5.11018.11
213
of 218
Table of figures
Table of figures
Signs and labels BM3200, BM3300...........................................................................................      20
Signs and labels BM3000 ..........................................................................................................      21
Signs and labels BM3300 with safety level..............................................................................      22
Dimensions BM3000..................................................................................................................      24
Dimensions BM3200, BM3300...................................................................................................      25
Control voltage / 24V-supply ......................................................................................................      28
Reducing of output power in dependence of altitude .................................................................      30
Output current dependent on supply voltage .............................................................................      31
Output power dependent on supply voltage...............................................................................      32
Output current dependent on supply voltage .............................................................................      32
Output power dependent on supply voltage...............................................................................      33
Output current dependent on DC-link voltage............................................................................      33
Derating at a static inverter frequency < 15 Hz..........................................................................      44
Typical current-time-diagram: Operation at constant load .........................................................      45
Typical current-time-diagram: Intermittent load cycle with peak value.......................................      45
Typical current-time-diagram: Intermittent load cycle ................................................................      46
Part number BM3200, BM3300  - front ......................................................................................      50
Type plate attachment BM3000 .................................................................................................      51
Type plate attachment BM3200, BM3300..................................................................................      52
Display-/Operator controls Controller BM3200, BM3300 EtherCAT
®
........................................      58
Display-/Operator controls Controller BM3200, BM3300 EtherCAT
®
........................................      59
Display-/Operator controls Controller BM3200, BM3300 CANopen
®
........................................      60
Display-/Operator controls Controller BM3200, BM3300 POWERLINK
®
..................................      61
Address switch setting EtherCAT®, POWERLINK®, VARAN ...................................................      68
Address setting CANopen
® ..................................................................................................................................  
    70
Danger area near the mechanical mounting ..............................................................................      75
Drilling template BM3000...........................................................................................................      78
Drilling template BM3200, BM3300............................................................................................      79
Mounting instruction BM3000.....................................................................................................      81
Mount protection cover (option) .................................................................................................      82
Mounting instruction BM3200, BM3300 .....................................................................................      83
Hazard areas during electrical installation .................................................................................      86
Mounting shield sheet ................................................................................................................      91
Wrap shield motor temperature cable around motor cable ........................................................      92
Tape shield motor temperature cable around ............................................................................      93
Shield connection motor cable ...................................................................................................      94
Connection diagram BM3000.....................................................................................................      99
Terminal diagram BM3XXX-XT (3-phase connection, internal ballast resistor) .......................      100
Terminal diagram BM3XXX-XT (3-phase connection, no internal ballast resistor) ..................      101
Terminal diagram BM3XXX-XT - axis unit with internal ballast resistor ...................................      103
Terminal diagram BM3XXX - axis unit, without internal ballast resistor...................................      104
Terminal diagram BM3XXX-XE - axis unit with internal ballast resistor...................................      105
Terminal diagram BM3XXX-XE - - axis unit without internal ballast resistor............................      106
Connection diagram BM3XXX-XT (single-phase connection, with internal ballast resistor) ....      108
Connection diagram BM3XXX-XT (single phase connection, no internal ballast resistor).......      109
Connection diagram BM3XXX-XE (1-phase connection, 230 V, with internal ballast resistor)      111
Connection diagram BM3XXX-XE (1-phase, 230 V, without internal ballast resistor) .............      112
Application: Power supply connection with energy compensation...........................................      114
Example: Further devices connected to the DC link ................................................................      116
Max. external capacitance that can be connected dependent on the power supply voltage ...      117























































Instruction handbook b maXX BM3000, BM3200, BM3300
Document no. 5.11018.11 Baumüller Nürnberg GmbH
214
of 218
Table of figures
Waiting time between two charging procedures.......................................................................     118
Connections front side..............................................................................................................     120
Connections at the top, BM3XXX-XT with internal ballast resistor...........................................     133
Connections at the top, BM3XXX-XT without internal ballast resistor......................................     134
Connections at the top, BM3XXX-XE with internal ballast resistor...........................................     135
Connections at the top, BM3XXX-XE without internal ballast resistor......................................     136
Installation of signal bus cable..................................................................................................     141
Connections at the bottom........................................................................................................     142
Connections PE........................................................................................................................     145
Structure of PE-connection.......................................................................................................     146
Bridging charge resistor X100 ..................................................................................................     148
Timing STO function.................................................................................................................     154
Supply with separate power supplies .......................................................................................     154
STO function S01: Operation with emergency stop device ......................................................     155
STO function S02: Operation with emergency stop device ......................................................     156
STO function: Operation with safety light grid ..........................................................................     157
STO function: Operation with SO4000 .....................................................................................     157
VARAN fieldbus connection .....................................................................................................     160
Motor cable with DSL Hiperface
®
 15 A.....................................................................................     179
Connecting cable for resolver...................................................................................................     185
Connecting cable for encoder with HIPERFACE
® ....................................................................................  
    186
Connecting cable for encoder with EnDat
®
 or SSI ...................................................................     187
Connecting cable for encoder with EnDat
®
 2.2 M12 ................................................................     188
Connecting cable for encoder with EnDat
®
 2.2 speedtec
®
 M23...............................................     189
Connecting cable for sine/square wave incremental encoder ..................................................     190
Block diagram mains filter.........................................................................................................     193































Instruction handbook b maXX BM3000, BM3200, BM3300
Document no. 5.11018.11 
215
of 218
Index
A
Accidents 18
C
Cable protection  191
Cables 177
Caution 8
Connecting cables, requirements  88
Connection cables  181, 182
Connectors 196
Current derating  44
Customer service  10
D
Danger 7
Data, electrical  35
DC link discharge time  16
DC-link discharge time  36, 38, 167
Demounting 200
Device protection  191
Disposal 10, 203
Drilling templates  79
E
Edges, sharp  75, 200
Electrical current, dangers of  16
Enable signals  149
Encoder cables  183
Energy supply, requirements  27
Environmental conditions, required  29
Error 172
Error acknowledge  175
Error detection  175
Error message  149
F
Fault correction  171
Filter 193
Fire fighting  17
Fuses 191
G
Ground conductor  89
Guarantee provisions  10
H
Hard hat  15
Hazardous situations  18
Hazards, special  16
I
Inductance, energy supply  27
Initial commissioning  85
Inspection intervals  166
Inspection, daily  166
Inspection, regularly scheduled  166
Installation 85
Installation, procedure  97
K
Key to symbols  7
L
Limitation of liability  8
M
Mains filter  193
Mains filter, selection  193, 195
Maintenance 165
Maintenance, periodic  167
Malfunctions, behavior  171
Modifications 11
Monitoring functions  172
Motor temperature sensor  95
Motor, requirements  28
Mounting 73
Moving components, danger from  17
N
Note 8
O
Operating conditions  26
Operating instructions, contents  11
Operating personnel  14
P
Packaging, disposal of  72
Part number  50
Personnel, qualified  14
Personnel, training  14
Power supply  27
Protective devices  13
Protective equipment  15
Protective gloves  15
Protective work clothing  15
R
Recommissioning 202
Repairs 170
Residual energy, danger from  16, 87




















































































Instruction handbook b maXX BM3000, BM3200, BM3300
Document no. 5.11018.11 Baumüller Nürnberg GmbH
216
of 218
Index
S
Safety equipment  18
Safety goggles  15
Safety shoes  15
Semiconductor fuses  191
Shutdown 199, 200
Signal bus  174
Signs and labels  19
Spare parts  10, 177, 196
Storage 199
Storage conditions  201
T
Technical data  23
Temperature range  29
Temperature range filter  193
Temperature sensor, motor  95
Termination plug  182
Transport 71
Transport inspection  72
Troubleshooting 175
Type code  53
Type plate  51, 52
U
Unpacking 72
Usage, compliant with the intended purpose 
12
V
Voltage test  87
W
Warning 7, 149, 172
Warning notes  7
Weight 25






































Instruction handbook b maXX BM3000, BM3200, BM3300
Document no. 5.11018.11 
217
of 218
Overview of Revisions
Overview of Revisions
Version Status Changes
5.11018.02 26-Oct-2012. Creation
5.11018.03 22-Apr-2013 Timing safety relay changed,
UL notes/UL fuses added,
Note „From six months storage period on, the capacitors are destroyed 
during commissioning, if they are not formed beforehand“ added
Electrical data of „Safe Torque Off“ connection changed
5.11018.04 10-Jan-2014 Declaration of Conformity according Machinery Directive
Safety Certificate
5.11018.05 11-Nov-2014 Error correction, additions STO, POWERLINK
®
5.11018.06 11-Jul-2015 New implemented VARAN, additional power ratings
5.11018.07 24-Sep-2015 New BM3200, 3300 without internal ballast resistor
5.11018.08 04-Jul-.2016 Additional power ratings, devices for 230 V power supply
5.11018.09 09-Aug-.2016 Timing STO module corrected
Technical data updated
5.11018.10 24-Apr-2017 Mains filter for single-phase devices
5.11018.11 16-Nov-2017 Technical data updated
5.11018.11 01-Mar-2018 Technical data updated
Safety function with short-circuit detection
New device BM3002 added





Instruction handbook b maXX BM3000, BM3200, BM3300
Document no. 5.11018.11 Baumüller Nürnberg GmbH
218
of 218
Notes:








Baumüller Nürnberg GmbH  Ostendstraße 80-90  90482 Nürnberg  T: +49(0)911-5432-0  F: +49(0)911-5432-130 www.baumueller.de
All information given in this handbook  is customer information, subject to change without notice. We reserve the right to further develop and actualize 
our products continuously using our permanent revision service. Please notice, that specifications/data/information are current values according to the printing date.
These statements are not legally binding according to the measurement, computation and calculations. Before you make any information given in this manual to the basis 
of your own calculations and/or applications, please make sure that you have the latest edition of the information in hand.
No liability can be accepted concerning the correctness of the information.




Неисправности преобразователя частоты. Распространённые поломки

Лёгкость эксплуатации и простота конструкции, позволило частотным преобразователям стать самыми распространёнными электротехническими устройствами в различных сферах жизнедеятельности человека. Однако поломки преобразователя частоты – не редкое явление. При их возникновении следует знать: в чём заключаются ошибки частотника, что к этому привело, и как эту проблему решить.

Распространённые виды неисправностей

Ввиду особенностей условий эксплуатации, выработанного ресурса и качества используемого инвертора, могут возникнуть различные неисправности.

Распознать их можно по дополнительным характеристикам подконтрольного устройства – электродвигателя. Лишь оценивая реакцию (либо её отсутствие), температуру, или параметры вращения подключённой электрической машины, можно констатировать факт неисправности частотного преобразователя.

Распространённые неполадки:

не вращается двигатель;

перегрев двигателя;

вращение двигателя с неизменной скоростью;

отсутствие восприятия частотником органов управления.

Причины поломок

Убедившись по реакции двигателя, что проблема именно в преобразователе, следующим верным шагом будет определение причин, вызвавших неполадку. Процесс диагностирования большинства неисправностей требует вскрытие защитного корпуса и частичной разборки инвертора.

Вероятные причины:

1. Скопление пыли. Значительное загрязнение пылью происходит преимущественно в сферах тяжёлой и пищевой промышленности (цементные заводы, камнеобрабатывающая отрасль, зерновые комбинаты). Это происходит из-за недостаточной конструктивной герметичности корпуса устройства или в результате его повреждения.

Осевшая пыль нарушает процесс охлаждения. В результате происходит перегрев и сокращение срока службы частотника. Токопроводящая пыль может вызвать пробой изоляции. Замыкание управляющей платы, способно спровоцировать ошибки частотного преобразователя.

2. Масляные загрязнения и эрозия. Машинное и трансформаторное масло способно причинить серьёзный ущерб преобразователю. Попавшее на электронные детали и управляющие платы инвертора масло, со временем разрушает отдельные элементы, что может привести к возгоранию и взрыву агрегата.

Самый верный способ продлить эксплуатационный ресурс устройства, это установка специального защитного корпуса. Он предотвратит попадание горюче-смазочных материалов внутрь конструкции.

3. Нарушение правил монтажа. В процессе установки и подключения преобразователя, часто встречаются следующие упущения:

— толщина сечения монтажного провода или жил кабеля менее допустимых значений;

— неправильное подключение электропроводки;

— наличие плохого электрического контакта в месте подсоединения клемм и проводов;

— нарушение изоляции жил кабеля или монтажных проводов (появляется возможность касания оголённых проводов о корпус устройства).

4. Неисправности многофункциональных клемм входа/выхода. Этот вид неполадок вызван чрезмерным износом разъёмов и клемм агрегата. Несоответствие технических условий эксплуатации также может вызвать эту проблему. При значительном превышении рабочего ресурса разъёмов, рабочие цепи входа/выхода на питающей плате могут попросту выгореть.

Типовые коды ошибок

Современные преобразователи частоты имеют собственную внутреннюю память. Она предназначена для записи всех контролируемых параметров в процессе функционирования инвертора. Имея достаточное количество данных, управляющая система способна сравнивать и анализировать собственные рабочие показатели.

На основе собранных данных, эта функция позволяет сформировать определённый код неисправности и записать его в журнал ошибок внутренней памяти. Для удобства мониторинга и диагностики неполадок, ошибки частотника выводятся на дисплей устройства. По значению кода определяют вид неисправности и пути её ликвидации.

Закодированные ошибки частотного преобразователя:

  • Over Load (OL) – перегрев двигателя, значительное возрастание момента силы на валу мотора.

Способ устранения: настройка тепловой зашиты инвертора, методом понижения значения тока в цепи и регулировки времени срабатывания;

  • Low Voltage (LV) – падение значения входного напряжения, отсутствие одной либо двух фаз.

Способ устранения: принятие мер по поиску места обрыва недостающих фаз(ы). Для установок, где остановка двигателя недопустима, следует незамедлительно перенастроить режим работы частотника в однофазный режим;

  • Over Current (OC) – сила тока в рабочей цепи преобразователя превышает допустимые значения.

Способ устранения: настройка и перепрограммирование номинальных токов электродвигателя и регулятора;

  • Over Voltage (OV) – отсутствие питания. Также может появиться в момент начала торможения двигателя.

Способ устранения: следует добавить в цепь «тормозной» резистор, перевести работу преобразовательного устройства в режим генератора, либо перенастроить функцию защиты от перенапряжения;

  • Over Heat (OH) – критическое значение температуры самого инвертора.

Способ устранения: очистка лопастей охлаждающего вентилятора, установка дополнительного вентилятора, либо замена существующего на более мощный. Решить проблему может и установка преобразователя в более подходящее место для эффективного отвода тепла от агрегата.

Большинство программируемых инверторов при возникновении неполадок отключают управляемый электродвигатель. Однако электрические машины аварийных систем питания, преднамеренно программируют на непрерывную работу в случае любой поломки преобразователя частоты.

Остались вопросы?
Специалисты ЭНЕРГОПУСК ответят на Ваши вопросы:
8-800-700-11-54 (8-18, Пн-Пт)

Понравилась статья? Поделить с друзьями:
  • Чек энерджи ошибка двигателя
  • Частотный преобразователь abb acs355 коды ошибок
  • Частыми причинами ошибок при самостоятельном выполнении физических упражнений является
  • Чек сформирован ошибочно мой налог что делать
  • Частотник шнайдер ошибка rdy